2007 KJ Liberty Manual

SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 9
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for selecting a Jeep Liberty and welcome to
our worldwide family.
This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both
on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform
tasks for which conventional two-wheel drive vehicles
were not intended. However, on-road ride and handling
will have a different feel from what drivers experience
with other vehicles, so take time to become familiar with
your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this manual. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering and transmission
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills

will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, dont overload it or expect it to
overcome the laws of nature. Always observe federal,
state, provincial, and local laws wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident. Be sure to read On-Road/Off-Road Driving
Tips in Section 5 of this manual.
Roll Over Warning
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance, higher center of gravity, and narrower
track than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications.
Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused to
go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity
INTRODUCTION
and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control it

may roll over when some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, roll over of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided

is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2
million annually. In a roll over crash an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Roll Over Warning Label
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored

in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that the manufacturer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owners manual:
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is located on a
stamped plate on the bottom of the left front A-Pillar,
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2
CONTENTS
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Security Alarm System If Equipped . . . . . . . . .19
Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .16
To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . .16
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .16
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Important Note About Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
12
To Unlatch The Swing Gate Flip-Up Window . .23
Power Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .24
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .39
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt

Retractor Lock-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Power Door Locks If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Door Locks If Equipped . . . . . . .29
Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Front Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .43

Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped . . . . .44
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
13
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint Systems (SRS) Airbags . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside

The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .74
14
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic
bag with the key code number on it. If you received your
keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you the
number. The key code can also be obtained by the dealer
from your vehicle invoice.
Ignition Key
Ignition Key Removal

Manual Transmission
To remove the ignition key, depress and hold the key
release button, turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove
the key.
Ignition Key Release Button
Automatic Transmission If Equipped

To remove the ignition key, place the gearshift lever in P
(Park), turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove the
key.
15
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear selector
lever. Do not leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Ignition Key Positions
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Always remove the key from the ignition, and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
16
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the drivers door and the key is fully inserted
in the ignition switch, a chime will sound to remind you
to remove the key.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock (manual transmission only). This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the
steering wheel is moved a half turn in either direction
and the key is not in the ignition, the steering wheel will
lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel 1/2
revolution from straight ahead position, turn off the
engine and remove the key. Rotate the steering wheel
slightly in both directions until the lock engages.
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock

Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly
to the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIM) prevents
unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the
engine. The system will shut the engine down after 2
seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the
vehicle. This system utilizes ignition keys which have an
electronic chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only
keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be
used to start and operate the vehicle for longer than the
2 second validation time period.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be

armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the SKIM indicator
light will come on for 3 seconds immediately after the
ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check. Afterwards,
if the bulb remains on, this indicates a malfunction in the
electronics. If the bulb begins to flash immediately after
the ignition switch is turned on, this indicates that an
invalid key is being used to start the vehicle. Both of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut down after
2 seconds of running. Keep in mind that a key which has
not been programmed is also considered an invalid key
even if it is cut to fit the ignition for that vehicle.
If the SKIM indicator light comes on during normal
vehicle operation (it has been running for longer than 10
seconds) a fault has been detected in the electronics and
the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible.
17
NOTE:
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
Mobil Speedpass, additional Sentry Keys, or any
other transponder equipped components on the same
keychain will not cause a key-related (Transponder)
fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Also, cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
18
Important Note About Service

A four digit PIN number is needed to service the Sentry
Key Immobilizer System. This number can be obtained
from your authorized dealer. However, this number can
also be found on your customer invoice that you were
given upon receipt of your vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,

bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Replacement Keys
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to

match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required for
dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be
performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed.
Customer Key Programming

You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
will sound and the SKIM indicator light will begin to
flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the
second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and

turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds, a single chime will sound. The SKIM indicator
light will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn
off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this
process to program up to a total of 8 keys.
General Information
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System complies with FCC
rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
19
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED

This system monitors the vehicle doors, swing gate,
swing gate flip-up window, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the system
provides both audible and visual signals. The horn,
headlights, and tail lights will sound/flash repeatedly for
three minutes. If disturbance is still present (drivers
door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three
minutes, the headlights and tail lights will flash for an
additional 15 minutes.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite
different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic
and the Security modes to hear the differences in the
horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will
need to know which mode has been activated in order to
deactivate it.
20
To Set the Alarm

The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry
transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you
use the power door lock switch while the door is open.
After all the doors are locked and closed, the Sentry
Key/Security Alarm Indicator Light (located in the
instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming. During this 16
second arming period, opening any door or the swing
gate will cancel the arming. If the system successfully
arms, the Sentry Key/Security Alarm Indicator Light
will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.
To Disarm the System
To disarm the system, you will need to press the Unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or
turn the ignition key to the RUN position. If something
has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will
sound three times when you unlock the doors. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE), there will not be a door lock cylinder on the
front passenger door, rear doors, or rear swing gate.
Therefore, you will be unable to disarm the system with
a manual unlock of the passenger or rear doors.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, once the
system is armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the
door handle to exit the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
press the Unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to disarm the system. You may also accidentally disarm the system by unlocking the drivers door
with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
but the Security Alarm will not arm.
21
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door.
They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors
are closed then fade to off, unless, the dome inhibit
feature was selected on the multi-function control lever.
Refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual.
The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the swing gate flip-up window, or activate the panic
alarm from distances of 2350 feet (715 meters) using a
transmitter. You dont have to point the transmitter at the
vehicle to activate the system. Each vehicle comes with
two transmitters.
Four Button Transmitter
To Unlock the Doors

Press and release the Unlock button once to unlock the
drivers door. Press the button again within 5 seconds to
unlock all the doors. If your vehicle is equipped with
Illuminated Entry, the interior lights also come on and
22
remain on for about 30 seconds, when you unlock the

doors. The park lights will flash twice to acknowledge
the unlock signal.
NOTE: The transmitter can be programmed to unlock
all the doors upon the first press of the Unlock button
(within 2350 feet (715 meters) of the vehicle) by performing the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter.
1. Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter.

2. Continue to hold the Lock button, wait at least 4 but
no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Unlock
button.
3. Release both buttons.
4. Repeating steps 13 will restore original transmitter
operation.
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4

but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Lock
button.
To Lock the Doors

Press and release the Lock button once to lock the
doors, swing gate flip-up window, and swing gate.
The horn will chirp and the park lights will flash once to
acknowledge the lock signal.
4. Repeating steps 13 will restore original operation.

NOTE: The Light Flash can be enabled or disabled
NOTE: The horn chirp can be enabled or disabled

(within 2350 feet (715 meters) of the vehicle) by the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the Lock button, wait at least 4 but

no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Panic button.
operation.
To Unlatch the Swing Gate Flip-Up Window
Press the Rear Release button twice to unlatch the
swing gate flip-up window.
WARNING!
To avoid injury stand back when opening. Glass will
automatically rise.
NOTE: The transmitter can be programmed to unlatch
the flip-up window immediately upon activation of the
23
Rear Release button (without pressing and holding)

1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Rear
Release button.
operation.
NOTE: Unlatching the flip-up window will unlock the
swing gate. After closing the flip-up window, press the
Lock button on the transmitter to lock the swing gate.
24
Panic Alarm
The panic mode flashes the park lights, and sounds the
horn for about 3 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
To Use the Panic Alarm
Press and hold the PANIC button for at least 1 second to
activate the panic alarm. Press and hold the PANIC
button a second time to deactivate the alarm. The alarm
will also shut itself off after starting the vehicle and
accelerating to 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite
different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic
and the Security modes to hear the differences in the
horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will
need to know which mode has been activated in order to
deactivate it.
To Program Additional Transmitters

NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the overhead
console, the transmitters may also be programmed
through the EVIC display. For additional information,
refer to Overhead Console If Equipped in Section 3.
(See page 136 for more information.)
Up to 4 transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle.
To obtain additional transmitters, contact your authorized dealer. To program a transmitter (within 2350 feet
(715 meters) of the vehicle), perform the following
procedure:
1. Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the
vehicle including any transmitters that are currently
programmed.
2. Enter Program Mode: Turn the ignition to the ON

position, and using a currently programmed transmitter;
press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter.
Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4 but
no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
PANIC button for at least 1 second. Release both buttons
simultaneously.
3. Program Each Transmitter: All transmitters to be used
with your vehicle must be programmed as follows:
Press and release the Lock and Unlock buttons simultaneously, followed by a press and release of ANY button
on each transmitter to be programmed. You will hear a
chime when a transmitter has been successfully programmed.
25
General Information
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
If your Remote Keyless Entry fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is from one to two years
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
26
Transmitter Battery Service

The recommended replacement battery is the Panasonic
CR2032 or equivalent.
1. Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar
object. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket
material during removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the

new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. Reassemble the transmitter case. Snap the halves
together and test transmitter operation.
DOOR LOCKS
The vacuum fluorescent (VF) display located in the
odometer area displays the word door as an indication
of a door ajar or door not completely closed. When the
vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not
completely closed, the VF display will show the word
door and then show the odometer/trip odometer
mileage (each for 2 seconds). The display will continue to
cycle.
Separating Transmitter
console, all warnings including door, GATE, and
GLASS will only be displayed in the EVIC display (not
in the instrument cluster). For additional information,
refer to Overhead Console If Equipped in Section 3.
27
If any other active warnings including GATE or

GLASS are present, they will be shown in the VF
display and will also continue to cycle. If the vehicle is
moving, three single chimes will occur (One chime for
each complete display cycle (three cycles total). After this,
the display will continue to cycle only (no chimes).
If the trip/reset button is pressed while the VF warnings
are being displayed, the VF display will revert back to
only displaying the odometer/trip odometer mileage.
Door Open Display
28
Manual Door Locks

Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Door Lock Plunger
WARNING!
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Power Door Locks If Equipped

A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press this
switch to lock or unlock the doors.
29
If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the door

will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the
ignition switch, and the drivers door is open, the doors
will not lock.
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle
until you pull up the lock plungers.
Automatic Door Locks If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically if:
1. all doors are closed,
2. vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h),
Power Door Lock Switch
3. and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

This will occur only once, will not reoccur until a door is
opened.
30
Child Protection Door Lock

The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with child
protection locks. If you push up on the lever on the open
edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of
the vehicle. Push the lever down to disengage the child
protection locks.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
Child Protection Door Lock
31
WINDOWS
Power Front Windows
The power window switches are located on the center
floor console. The top left switch controls the left front
window and the top right switch controls the right front
window. The lower left switch controls the left rear
passenger window, and the lower right switch controls
the right rear passenger window. The switches will
continue to function for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition key has been removed, or until a door is opened.
Power Window Switches
The window lock switch located next to the window

switches allows you to disable the rear passenger window switches that are located on the back of the center
floor console.
32
Auto Down Feature If Equipped

The drivers and passengers front window switches
have an auto down feature. Press the window switch past
the detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Power Rear Windows
The rear passenger window switches are located on the
back of the center floor console.
Rear Window Switches
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
33
To open the swing gate, pull the gate handle to its first
detent to open just the flip-up window. Pull the handle to
its second detent (all the way) to open both the flip-up
window and swing gate.
REAR SWING GATE

The swing gate can be unlocked using the remote keyless
entry, or by activating the power door lock switches
located on the front doors.
WARNING!
automatically rise.
Swing Gate Release Handle
34
WARNING!
automatically rise.
be displayed in the EVIC display (not in the instrument

cluster). For additional information, refer to Overhead
Console If Equipped in Section 3.
The vacuum fluorescent (VF) display located in the

odometer area displays the words GATE and/or
GLASS as an indication of when the swing gate and/or
flip-up window, is not completely closed. When the
vehicle is not moving and the swing gate and/or flip-up
window is not completely closed, the VF display will
show the word GATE and/or GLASS and then show
the odometer/trip odometer mileage (each for 2 seconds). The display will continue to cycle.
console, the warnings door, GATE, or GLASS will
Gate Open Display
35
chime for each complete display cycle). After this, the VF

display will continue to sequence only (no chimes).
If the trip/reset button is pressed while the VF warnings
are being displayed, the VF display will revert back to
only displaying the odometer/trip odometer mileage.
NOTE: Close swing gate before flip-up window.
CAUTION!
Glass Open Display
If any other active warnings including door are

present, they will be shown in the VF display and will
also continue to cycle. If the vehicle is moving, two single
chimes will occur if the rear glass is open or three single
chimes will occur if the rear swing gate is open (one
Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing

swing gate, as damage to the blade will result.
36
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes.
Keep the flip-up window closed when you are
operating the vehicle.
NOTE: The rear swing gate will lock while the rear
wiper is operating. The gate will stay locked until the
wiper is turned off and the gate is unlocked (by key,
lock switch, or key fob).
NOTE: The swing gate will lock automatically when the
vehicle begins moving.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if
equipped, window bags for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children
too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be
used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision which includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
37
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
38
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during

very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
39
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Latch Plate
40
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
arent as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from
injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
41
NOTE: The Seat Belt Indicator Light will remain on

until the drivers seat belt is buckled.
Removing Slack From Belt
42
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces wont be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS

on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
pretensioner, etc.).
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor

Lock-Out
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the 65% rear seat back is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seat back is not fully latched.
NOTE:
If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
out, check that the rear seat back is fully latched.
If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
43
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied. If the rear seat back is not fully upright and
locked and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be
pulled out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately be taken to your dealer for service. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. To lower the shoulder belt height, push
the button and slide the height adjuster down. To raise
44
the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height adjuster

up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
WARNING!
Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that
the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
youll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
45
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode

Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped).
Children 12 years old and under should be properly
restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature at the driver and front passenger
seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury
in the event of a head-on collision.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is

designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupants chest.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
46
WARNING!
After a vehicle collision, the driver and front
passenger outboard seat belt system must be
checked by a qualified technician to verify that
the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all
seat belts should be checked for proper function.
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other seat belt function is
not working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners

The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped
with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove
any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
collision. This device improves the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front Airbag
Control Module. Like the front airbags, the pretensioners
are a single use item. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, they
must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert)
If the drivers or front passenger seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the drivers or front passenger seat belt
is buckled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the drivers or front passenger seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
47
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. The manufacturer does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
buckle the drivers or front passenger seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY/RUN position (engine does not need to be running), and wait for
the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the drivers or front passenger seat
belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending with
the seat belt buckled.
48
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single

chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System

(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the drivers or
front passenger seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
WARNING!
49
Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint Systems (SRS) Airbags
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can

increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Front Airbag Components
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The drivers front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger side airbag is mounted in
50
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
Occupant Classification System in this section).
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Window Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING!
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the location of the window bag. The area
where the window bag is located should remain free
from any obstructions.
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
51
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat

hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to Occupant Classification System in this section) has determined the seat is empty or
is occupied by someone that is classified in the child
category. This could be a child, a teenager, or even a small
adult.
52
If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the

crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the
airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. See Child Restraint in this section.
You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against
the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully into
the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under If
You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual.
WARNING!
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags wont deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
53
Airbag System Components

The airbag system consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller
Remote Acceleration Sensors
Airbag Warning Light
Driver Airbag
Passenger Airbag
Window Bags above Side Windows (If Equipped)
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Interconnecting Wiring
Knee Impact Bolsters
Front Acceleration Sensors
54
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners

Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Occupant Classification Module
Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
Interconnecting Wiring
Pressure Sensor, Bladder Assembly, and Belt Tension
Sensor
How The Airbag System Works
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. Based on the level of collision
severity, the front control module determines the
proper rate of inflation. The front airbag inflators are
designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size

provided by the Occupant Classification Module. The
ORC will not detect roll over, or rear impacts.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light
(located in the instrument cluster) and PAD indicator
light (located in the front passenger grab handle) for 6 to
8 seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned
on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning light will
turn off. The PAD indicator light will function normally
(Refer to Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator
Light in this section). If the ORC detects a malfunction
in any part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG

warning light either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound if the light comes on again after
initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instrument panel could mean you wont have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
55
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates

may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 5070 milliseconds. This
is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
The drivers front airbag gas is vented through vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passengers front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. In this way the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
(with side impact option) detects a collision requiring
the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on
56
the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas

is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating
window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of
the time it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force
to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the
window bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 312 inches (9 cm)
thick when it is inflated.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) will classify an occupant in the front passenger seat into a size
category based on sensor readings from within the
seat cushion. Occupants should try to remain in a
normally seated position. If the occupants weight is

transferred to another object in the vehicle (i.e. feet on
the dashboard), the OCS may not be able to properly
approximate occupant size. Furthermore, the occupant
size may appear to increase or decrease due to objects
hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the
seat, or objects lodged underneath the seat. If there is
a rapid change in temperature or humidity, the OCS
may not be able to properly approximate occupant
size. If your seat including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take the
vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used.
If there is a fault present in the system, the AIRBAG
warning light will light indicating that you should
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. In the presence of an occupant in the passenger seat, if both the
PAD indicator light (located in the front passenger
57
grab handle) and AIRBAG warning light (located in

the instrument cluster) are illuminated the airbag will
be disabled.
The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the
event of a collision for occupants classified into the
empty or child size categories. The PAD indicator light
will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is
OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size
category is a child. Also, when the seat is empty or an
object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is
placed on the seat, the light will remain OFF. (The PAD
indicator light is an amber light located on the grab
handle in front of the passenger seat.)
Indicator Light Location
For almost all sizes of properly seated adults, the passenger frontal airbag will be enabled in the event of a
collision. For small teenagers and some small adults,
depending on size, the airbag may or may not be enabled
in the event of a collision. Both drivers and passengers
58
should always use the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front passenger is properly positioned or not. If
the PAD indicator light comes on when an adult is in the
passenger seat, have the passenger re-position themselves in the seat until the light goes out. Remember, if
the PAD indicator light is illuminated the passenger front
airbag will not inflate. For most children properly seated
on the front seat and most properly installed child
restraint systems, the airbag will be disabled and the PAD
indicator light will be on. However, under certain conditions even with the child restraint system has been
installed properly, the PAD indicator light may not be on
even though the air bag is disabled. This can occur if the
child restraint is lighter than the threshold weight necessary to turn the PAD indicator light on. If this happens to
you, you can check to ensure the airbag is disabled by
performing the following simple procedure. Place the
ignition key in the RUN position and apply downward
pressure to the child restraint on the surface that the child
will be sitting on. Slowly count to 10 and watch the PAD

indicator light. The PAD indicator light should turn on.
When you release the pressure, the PAD indicator light
may stay on or may turn off but the airbag is disabled. If
at all possible, place children 12 years and younger in a
back seat.
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into one of three size categories
based on the input from the Bladder Assembly and a
Belt Tension Sensor. The size categories include empty,
child, and adult. The OCM sends the Occupant Classification to the ORC to determine if a front passenger
airbag is allowed. If a fault is present, the AIRBAG
warning light is illuminated.
The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator

Light indicates to the driver and passenger when the
airbag is turned OFF. In the presence of a properly
seated occupant, when the PAD indicator light is
illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also, when the Occupant Classification System detects either an empty seat
or a weight less than the predetermined threshold, the
ORC will not illuminate the PAD indicator light even
though the airbag is turned OFF.
The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) is located at the
outboard passenger lap belt anchor. The BTS creates a
signal based on outboard lap belt tension. This signal
is sent to the OCM to ensure that the resultant bladder
pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does
not cause a small occupant to be classified as a larger
occupant.
59
The Bladder Mat and Pressure Sensor are located

beneath the seat cushion foam. The pressure sensor
sends a signal to the OCM.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
60
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not

designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
61
However, if you havent healed significantly within a

few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal byproduct of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instructions for cleaning.
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
62
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Classification System serviced as well.
Enhanced Accident Response System (E.A.R.S.)
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, the interior lights will turn on
and the power door locks (if equipped) will unlock 5
seconds after airbag deployment.
Also, the fuel system will shut off immediately upon

airbag deployment (gasoline models only). The ignition
switch will need to be cycled (i.e. turn the ignition key
from the ON position to the LOCK position) after approximately 5 seconds in order to restart the vehicle.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if

the airbag system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, including adding any
kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim
cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your
trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for
persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
63
WARNING!
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
64

You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
promptly:
Does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds after the
ignition switch is first turned on.
Remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval.
Comes on for any period of time while driving.
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the childs
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
owners manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child:
This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
65
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than

infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and are
older than one year old. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicles seat belts properly. If the child
66
cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while
the childs back is against the seatback, they need a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
(Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield
and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion.)
For additional information refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injuries to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you

try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
The restraint must be appropriate for your childs
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors,
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat
67
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt

occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will
have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor
until there is enough to allow you to pass through the
child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle.
Then, pull the belt until it is all extracted from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return to the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion about the child restraint. Refer to Automatic
Locking Mode earlier in this section.
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturers instructions tell you.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
68
LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower

Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
Your vehicles rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicles seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicles seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all

the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages

that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats
in adjacent rear-seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints
using the vehicles seat belts.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
69
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at

the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
Latch Anchorages
70
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with

separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then lift the tether anchorage cover directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach
the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route
the tether strap to provide the most direct path between
the anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint and, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
71
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps

according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions.
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the

belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight,
however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
WARNING!
If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will

have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor
until there is enough to allow you to pass through the
child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle.
Then, pull the belt until it is all extracted from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling
on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about
the child restraint. Refer to Automatic Locking Mode
earlier in this section.
Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the

lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
72
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times

to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still cant be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still cant make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether under
the head restraint between the head restraint posts.
Tether Strap Mounting
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
73
Check belt fit periodically. A childs squirming or

slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
74
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for a extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode
when driving with any windows open, even if only
slightly, to help keep fresh air circulating inside vehicle. Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into
the vehicle.
75
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
pretensioners, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
NOTE: The Seat Belt Indicator Light will remain on
until the drivers seat belt is buckled.
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned on. If the bulb is not lit during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
76
Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should feel the air
directed against the windshield.
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes
are detected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped . . . .82
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .83
Power Remote Control Mirrors
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
3
HandsFree Communication (UConnect)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
UConnect System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Heated Remote Control Mirrors

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Lighted Vanity Mirrors If Equipped . . . . . . .84
Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
78
Front Seat Adjustment Recline . . . . . . . . . . 109
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6Way Drivers Power Seat With

Manual Recliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fog Lights If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Heated Seats If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
65/35 Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Battery Saver Feature Exterior Lights . . . . . 117
Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Instrument Panel And Interior Lights . . . . . . . 118
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped . . . . . 118
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

High Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
79
To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Overhead Console If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 133
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Dome/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Electronic Vehicle Information Center . . . . . . . 135
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . 136
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Garage Door Opener If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 143
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
When Your Vehicle Is New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 147
ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . . 128
Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 129
Power Sunroof If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
80
Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Smokers Package If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 153
Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Roof Luggage Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Retractable Cargo Area Cover

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
81
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and

vertical adjustment of the mirror.
Annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you can
be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror
to the night position (toward rear of vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
windshield).
82
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
83
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature

All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and
normal.
Power Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
drivers door trim panel below the door lock switch.
84
Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right
mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent
accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished
adjusting the mirror. Press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switches
Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defrost.
Lighted Vanity Mirrors If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
When the ignition is turned off, the light will turn off
automatically (after approximately 8 minutes).
Lighted Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension If Equipped

This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
85
HANDSFREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect)

IF EQUIPPED
UConnect is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., Call Mike Work or Dial
248-555-1212). Your cellular phones audio is transmitted through your vehicles audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect system.
NOTE: The UConnect system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile,
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the systems microphone for private conversation.
86
The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32

names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect
features Bluetooth technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicles UConnect system. The UConnect system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
UConnect Switches
The UConnect system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
87
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for

the voice on beep, which follows the Ready prompt
or another prompt.
The UConnect system is fully integrated with the

vehicles audio system. The volume of the UConnect
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
For certain operations, compound commands can be

used. For example, instead of saying Setup and then
Phone Pairing, the following compound command
can be said: Setup Phone Pairing.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from

the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect
system and to navigate through the UConnect menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
For each feature explanation in this section, only the

combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry, or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
Phonebook and New Entry. Please remember, the
UConnect system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
88
Voice Command Tree

Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say Help following the voice on beep. The UConnect system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect system from idle, simply
press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect system sessions begin with a
press of the Phone button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect System to a Cellular Phone

To begin using your UConnect system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone.
NOTE: The UConnect system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile,
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owners manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
www.dodge.com/uconnect
www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect System

pairing instructions:
Press the Phone button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Setup Phone Pairing and follow the audible prompts.
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say Pair a
Phone and follow the audible prompts.
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
89
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a

priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect System. The priority allows the
UConnect system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to Advanced Phone
Connectivity).
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
Dial.
90
System will prompt you to say the number you want

call.
For example, you can say 234-567-8901.
The UConnect system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
you can say John Doe, where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook. Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect
Phonebook, to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
The UConnect system will confirm the name and

then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook

Dial or Call.
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended

when vehicle is not in motion.
System will prompt you to say the name of the person

you want call.

the name of the person you want to call. For example,

Phonebook New Entry.
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of

long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say Robert Smith or Robert
instead of Bob.
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
Home, Work, Mobile, or Pager). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
91
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each

language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
When prompted, recite the phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are adding.

Phonebook Edit.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook

entry that you wish to edit.
The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32

names in the phonebook with each name having up to
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are editing.
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,

mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
92
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,

you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Does
work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
Phonebook Delete.
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will

then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say List
Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the Voice Recognition button
while the UConnect system is playing the desired
entry and say Delete.
After you enter the name, the UConnect system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook

Phonebook Erase All.
The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook
Phonebook List Names.
The UConnect system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
93
To call one of the names in the list, press the Voice

Recognition button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say Call. NOTE: the user can also
exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point.
The UConnect system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
94
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call

Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the Phone button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the Phone button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in

Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or
Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to Toggling Between Calls. To combine two calls, refer
to Conference Call.
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the Phone button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
Phone button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Phone button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the Phone button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the Voice Recognition button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress. After the second call has
established, press and hold the Phone button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
95
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Phone
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
Redial.
The UConnect system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect
system.
96
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect system to the mobile phone.
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect System Features

Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect system is
using,
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
97
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances

of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency

number for your area.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system

is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
Towing Assistance.
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
98
Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to Working with Automated
Systems. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to Working
with Automated Systems.
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect system.
When calling a number with your UConnect system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word Send. For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the Voice Recognition
button and say 3 7 4 6 # Send. Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by Send is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
99
Barge In - Overriding Prompts

The Voice Recognition button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a, you could press the Voice Recognition button and
say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Phone and Network Status Indicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad

You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicles
audio system. The UConnect system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.

Setup Confirmations. The UConnect system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
100
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the

dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect system:
Press the Voice Recognition button.
Mute.
In order to un-mute the UConnect system:
Press the Voice Recognition button.

Mute-off.
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number #121, you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to
the UConnect system or vice-versa, press the Voice
Recognition button and say Transfer Call.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the

UConnect System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively connected
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular
phone and the UConnect system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone users
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Setup Phone pairing.
When prompted, say List Phones.
101
The UConnect system will play the phone names of

all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To select or delete a paired
phone being announced, press the Voice recognition
button and say Select or Delete. Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect system
that you want to use it with.
Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts.
102
You can also press the Voice Recognition button

anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
You can also press the Voice Recognition button

anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
The selected phone will be used for the next phone

call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect

System
Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would

speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.

Setup Phone Pairing.
At the next prompt, say Delete and follow the
prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)

Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking

during a voice recognition period.
Performance is maximized under:

low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
smooth road surface,
fully closed windows,
dry weather condition.
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say send.
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
103
It is not recommended to store similar sounding

names in the UConnect phonebook.
UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
You can say O (letter O) for 0 (zero). 800 must be
spoken eight-zero-zero.
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
104
smooth road surface,

fully closed windows, and
dry weather condition.
Operation from driver seat.
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect system.
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link

Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth on mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
105
106
107
108
North American English

Primary
Alternate(s)
Zero
Oh
Add location
Add new
All
All of them
Confirmation prompts
Confirmations prompts
Delete a name
Delete
Language
Select language
List names
List all
List paired phones
List phones
Pager
Beeper
Phone pairing
Pairing
Phonebook
Phone book
Return to main menu
Return. Main menu
Select phone
select
Set up
Phone settings phone set
up
SEATS
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment
bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near
the floor. Position the seat and be sure the latch engages
fully.
Manual Seat Adjustment
109
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the

seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seat Adjustment Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward, and release the lever.
Recline Control Lever
110
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
6Way Drivers Power Seat with Manual Recliner
The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near
the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or down,
forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Power Seat Switches
This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to

the rear of the power seat switch. Pull up on the lever to
recline the seat.
111
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the
event of impact from the rear. Adjustable head restraints
should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. The head restraints have a locking button that
must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint. The
restraints may be raised without pushing in the button.
Recline Control Lever
Adjustable Head Restraints
112
Heated Seats If Equipped

The heated seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the front seats. Pressing this switch to its desired setting
(HI or LO) will activate the respective heating element for
the heated seat.
Once the heated seat switch is activated, depressing it a

second time will de-activate it.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
Heated Seat Switches
65/35 Split Folding Rear Seat

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
113
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
114
To fold the 65/35 rear seat, perform the following

steps:
1. Locate the seatback release handle on the outboard top
side of each rear seatback; lift up on the handle, and
rotate the lever forward until the seatback releases. Fold
the seatback completely forward.
Folding Rear Seat
NOTE: When lifting up on the release handle, the

seatback will release easier if you do not pull forward on
the seatback; only lift up on the release handle until the
seatback disengages, then fold the seat forward.
Rear Seat Release
When the seatback is folded completely forward, the

head restraints should be flush against the seat cushion.
To restore the 65/35 rear seat to the upright

position perform the following steps:
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position. The seat release handle will be flush
with the seatback when the seat is fully latched.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever inside your vehicle located under
the left side of the instrument panel.
NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the

center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for
use. If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt, please
make sure your seatback is fully latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
115
Hood Release Lever
116
Then, reach under the hood and slide the safety latch to
the right and lift the hood.
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the

hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before
driving.
Underhood Safety Latch
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12
inches (30 cm) and then push hood closed. This should
LIGHTS
Multi-Function Control Lever
The multi-function control lever controls the operation of
the park lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming,
and turn signals.
117
Battery Saver Feature Exterior Lights

If the park lights, headlights, fog lights, or high beams are
left on when the ignition switch is in the OFF position,
the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the
exterior lights after eight minutes. Normal operation will
resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the
switch is turned to another position.
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end cap of the multi-function control lever to the
first detent for parking lights and instrument panel
lights. Turn to the second detent for headlight operation.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the multi-function control
lever up or down.
Multi-Function Control Lever
118
Instrument Panel and Interior Lights

When the multi-function control lever is in the parklight,
or headlight position, rotating the center portion of the
lever up and down will increase and decrease the brightness (dimmer control) of the instrument panel lights. Full
daytime brightness on all electronic displays (odometer,
overhead console, radio, and climate control) is obtained
by rotating the center portion of the control to the first
detent above the dimmer range. Rotating the control to
the second detent above the dimmer range turns the
interior lights on. Rotating the control to the Off
(extreme bottom) position disables all the interior lights,
even when the doors and liftgate are open. While in the
Off position the instrument panel lighting is at the
lowest light level and may not be suitable for night
driving.
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped

The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity
level after the engine has started. The lights remain on
until the ignition switch is turned OFF or the parking
brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for
normal night time driving.
Lights-On Reminder
A chime will sound if the drivers door is left open, and
the headlights or parking lights are left on.
Fog Lights If Equipped
The front fog light switch is located in the multifunction control lever. To activate the fog lights,
turn on the park or low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the lever. The Fog Light Indicator Light
will illuminate when the fog lights are on.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the park
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multi-function control lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
If either light flashes at a very fast rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator is defective.
NOTE: A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on
for more than 2 miles (3.2 km).
High Beam Switch
Pull the multi-function control lever towards you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the multifunction control lever a second time to switch the headlights to LOW beam. The High Beam Indicator Light
will illuminate when the high beams are on.
119
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multi-function control lever toward
the steering wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn
on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.
The High Beam Indicator Light will illuminate when
the high beams are on.
Interior Lights
The overhead lights will come on when a door is opened,
and when the rotating ring on the multi-function control
lever is in a position other than OFF. They may also be
turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch
on the multi-function control lever fully upward or by
pressing the Unlock button on the keyfob.
The overhead lights will automatically turn off in about 8
minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left
in the dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON to
restore the overhead light operation.
120
Front Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each
light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the
lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of the
lens a second time.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch on the
control lever. This control lever is located on the right
side of the steering column. For front wiper operation,
turn the control lever end cap upward to select the
desired wiper speed.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Intermittent Wiper System

The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LOW continual speed position. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
121
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
122
TILT STEERING COLUMN

To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Pull the lever back towards you and firmly push
the lever until it is above the lower surface of the shroud
to lock the column in place.
Tilt Steering Column
123
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator operations beginning at speeds of approximately 30 mph (48
km/h). The controls are mounted on the steering wheel
and consist of ONOFF, SET, RESACCEL, CANCEL, and
DECEL controls.
To Activate
Press and release the ONOFF button to turn the system
on. To turn the system off, press the ONOFF button
again. The system should be turned off when not in use.
The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the system is on.
124
To Set At A Desired Speed

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the memory. Pressing the ONOFF button or turning off the ignition erases the memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, press and release the
RESACCEL button. Resume can be used at any speed
beginning at approximately 30 mph (48 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting

When the Speed Control is on and set, speed can be
increased by pressing and holding the RESACCEL button. When the button is released, a new set speed will be
established.
Tapping the RESACCEL button once will result in a 2
mph (3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the button is
tapped, speed increases, so tapping the button three
times will increase speed by 6 mph (9 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is on and set, press
and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph (2
km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
speed decreases.
To Accelerate for Passing

Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
ft. (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. (If the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56
km/h), the Speed Control will automatically disengage).
If this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the desired speed.
A full throttle (high RPM) acceleration, while the system
is engaged, will cause the system to disengage.
Vehicles may exhibit several 4-3 downshifts under the
above conditions. To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to improve vehicle performance, it is advisable
to lock out overdrive. Press the O/D OFF button on the
right side of the shift lever.
125
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always turn the system
off when you are not using it.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake
Assist System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) and ESP
(Electronic Stability Program). All five systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions are commonly referred to as ESP.
126
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to Anti-Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.
WARNING!
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the users safety or the safety of others.
TCS (Traction Control System)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
Partial Off mode. Refer to ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) in this section.
127
BAS (Brake Assist System)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicles braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
128
WARNING!
BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the users safety or the safety of others.
ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the drivers steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It
can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM can not
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
129
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
130
ESP/TCS Indicator Light

The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has 2 available operating modes in 2WD,
4WD Part Time, 4WD Full Time (Selec-Trac Only), and on
2WD vehicles. The system has a single operating mode in
4WD Low Range.
High Range (4WD Part Time, 4WD Full Time) or

2WD Models
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD, 4WD
Part Time, 4WD Full Time (Selec-Trac Only), and on 2WD
vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer
case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD low range or
neutral back to 4WD high range or 2WD, the ESP system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
all driving situations. ESP should only be turned off for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP
Control Switch (located on top of the steering column).
When in Partial Off mode, the TCS portion of ESP,
except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the ESP/TCS Indicator
Light will be illuminated. All other stability features of
131
ESP function normally. This mode is intended to be used

if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions
and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is
required to gain traction. To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the ESP Control Switch. This will restore
the normal ESP On mode of operation.
ESP Control Switch
132
NOTE: To improve the vehicles traction when driving

with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the ESP Control Switch. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains

off. When the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40
km/h) the ESP system shuts off. ESP is off at low vehicle
speeds in 4WD low range so that it will not interfere with
off-road driving but ESP function returns to provide the
stability feature at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h). The
ESP/TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in
4WD low range when ESP is off.
4WD Low Range
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp

The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with BAS. The ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster both come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They
should go out with the engine running. If the ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD low
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range
or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 2WD,
4WD high range, or neutral to 4WD low range, the ESP
system will be in this mode. In 4WD low range, ESP and
TCS, except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches a
speed of 30 mph (48 km/h). At 30 mph (48 km/h), the
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),

see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the
ignition switch is turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
133
OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED

The overhead console contains dome/reading lights, an
optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink), an
optional sunroof switch, and an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) that consists of the following:
Compass/temperature display
Trip information displays
Vehicle information warning message displays
Customer programmable features
Pressing the MENU button will change the displayed
programming features. Pressing the STEP button will
select the available choices. Pressing the C/T (Compass/
Temperature) button will return the display to the normal
compass/temperature display.
134
NOTE: Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat

soak. For best accuracy, the vehicle should be driven at a
speed greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for several minutes.
Dome/Reading Lights
Located in the overhead console are two dome/reading
lights.
The dome/reading lights illuminate when a door or the

swing gate is opened or when the interior lights are
turned on by rotating the dimmer control located on the
multi-function lever.
The reading lights are activated by pressing on the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The dome/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle.
Dome Reading Lamps
Electronic Vehicle Information Center

The electronic vehicle information center (EVIC), when
the appropriate conditions exist, displays the following
messages and symbols. Each message is accompanied by
a series of beeps:
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
N DOORS OPEN (N = 2, 3, 4)
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
REARGATE OPEN
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
LIFTGLASS OPEN
135
TURN SIGNAL ON (with graphic)

PERFORM SERVICE
REMOTE KEY BATTERY LOW
NO J1850 BUS MSGS RECEIVED
LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE
RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE
LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE
RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE
SPARE LOW PRESSURE
CHECK TPM SYSTEM
136
Customer Programmable Features

Press the MENU button until one of the display choices
following appears:
Language?
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
computer functions. Press the STEP button while in this
display to select English, Francais, Deutsch, Italiana, or
Espanol. As you continue the displayed information will
be shown in the selected language.
Display U.S. or Metric?
Pressing the STEP button when in this display selects US
or Metric. The overhead console and instrument panel
displays will be in the selected units.
Auto Door Locks?
When this feature is selected, all doors and the swing
gate will lock automatically when the speed of the
vehicle reaches 15 mph (25 km/h). Pressing the STEP

button when in this display will select Yes or No.
Auto Unlock On Exit? (Available Only When the
AUTO DOOR LOCKS Feature is Turned On )
When this feature is selected all the vehicles doors will
unlock when the drivers door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select Yes or No.
Remote Unlock Drivers Door 1st?
When this feature is selected only the drivers door will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button and require a second press to unlock the
remaining locked doors and swing gate. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and
the swing gate will unlock at the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button. Pressing the STEP button
when in this display will select DRIVERS DOOR 1ST or
ALL DOORS. This can also be programmed using the key

fob, refer to Remote Keyless Entry earlier in this
section.
Train Remote?
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select
Yes or No.
NOTE: Any time you perform this procedure, it is
necessary to retrain all currently trained key fobs.
To Train Additional Key Fobs (using the EVIC module)
1. Press the MENU button until TRAIN REMOTE? NO is
displayed. Press the STEP button to change to YES. Then,
PRESS A VALID FOB KEY will be displayed. Press either
the Lock or Unlock button on the current key fob.
2. The next display will say PRESS FOB 2 LOCK &
UNLOCK. Press both key fob buttons simultaneously.
137
3. The next display will say PRESS FOB 2 UNLOCK.

Press the unlock button on the second key fob.
4. The next display will say FOB 2 TRAINED. At this
point, the procedure can be exited by pressing the STEP,
RESET, or C/T button.
5. Repeat step 2 4 to train additional key fobs. A total
of four key fobs can be programmed.
Can also be programmed using the key fob, refer to
Remote Keyless Entry earlier in this section.
Sound Horn On Lock?
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is
pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the
flash lights on lock/unlock feature. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select Yes or No.
Can also be programmed using the key fob, refer to
Remote Keyless Entry earlier in this section.
138
Flash Lights With Locks?

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select Yes or No. Can also be programmed using the key fob, refer to Remote Keyless
Entry earlier in this section.
Headlamp Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when
exiting the vehicle, to have the headlamps remain on for
30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not remain on. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90, or OFF.
Service Interval
When this feature is selected a service interval between
2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000 km) in 500
mile (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the
STEP button when in this display will select distances

between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000
km) in 500 mile (800 km) increments.
Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
Interval was Changed)
When this feature is selected the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
interval. Pressing the STEP button when in this display
will select Yes or No.
Low Fuel Chime?
When this feature is selected a chime will sound when
the Low Fuel Indicator Light is displayed in the
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the STEP button when
in this display will select Yes or No.
Mini-Trip Computer
This feature, located in the overhead console, displays
information on outside temperature, compass direction,
and trip information.
Reset Button
Use this button to reset the Average Economy, Trip Miles,
and Time Elapsed displays. This will occur only if a
resettable function is currently being displayed (Average
Economy, Trip Miles, and Time Elapsed). A single chime
will sound to indicate that a reset has occurred.
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within 3 seconds
while in any of the three resettable displays, the RESET
button will reset all three displays.
A chime (two beeps) will sound to indicate that a reset
has occurred.
139
Menu Button
Press the Menu button to scroll through the following
screens: LANGUAGE, DISPLAY U.S. OR METRIC,
AUTO DOOR LOCKS, AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT, REMOTE UNLOCK DRIV DOOR 1ST, SOUND HORN
WITH LOCK, FLASH LIGHTS WITH LOCKS, HEADLAMP DELAY, SERVICE INTV, LOW FUEL CHIME, and
TRAIN REMOTE.
C/T Button
Press the C/T button to display the outside temperature
and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.
140
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32F (0C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.
Step Button
Press the STEP button to cycle through all of the displays.
The displays are: Average Miles/GAL, Miles To Empty,
Trip Miles, Time Elapsed, Miles To Service, Tire PSI, and
Blank Screen.
Average Miles/GAL
Shows the average fuel economy in miles per gallon
(MPG), or liters per 100 km (L/100 km) since the last
reset.
Miles To Empty
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled before
the fuel gauge shows E (Empty). The distance is calculated by multiplying the amount of fuel remaining by the
projected fuel economy. The distance predicted will
change every few seconds to a higher or lower number as
these factors change. This display cannot be reset.
Trip Miles
Shows the distance traveled since the last reset.
Time Elapsed
Shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last
reset.
Miles To Service
Shows the amount of miles remaining until service is
required (owner selected).
Tire PSI
Shows the pressure and location of each tire, except for
the spare tire. The tire location will blink when under
pressure.
Blank Screen
Shows a blank screen. Pressing the C/T button returns to
the Compass and Temperature display. Pressing the STEP
button returns you to the Average Miles per Gallon
display.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing three 360 degree turns in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will
turn off and the compass will function normally.
141
Manual Compass Calibration

If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
Calibration mode.
To Put Into a Calibration Mode
Turn on the ignition and set the display to Compass/
Temperature. Press and hold the RESET button (more
than 10 seconds) to change the display between VARIANCE (compass variance) and CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL symbol is displayed complete three 360 degree turns in an area free from large
metal objects or power lines. The CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.
142
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the

display to Compass/Temperature. Press and hold the
RESET button five seconds (no more than 10 seconds).
The last variance zone number will be displayed. Press
the STEP button to select the new variance zone and
press the RESET button to resume normal operation.
General Information
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
143
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Changes or modifications not expressively approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void
the users authority to operate this equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a garage door

opener or gate operator, make sure that people and
objects are out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage. When programming a
garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage. Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop
and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or by calling:
1-800-355-3515.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED

Equipped in vehicles that have the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a
convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radiofrequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such
as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Additional
HomeLink
information
can
be
found
at:
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
144
Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are

programming for use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink
buttons be erased for security purposes. To erase the
programmed buttons, perform the procedure shown
below under When Your Vehicle Is New, or, for assistance, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or by
calling: 1-800-355-3515.
When Your Vehicle Is New
Prior to programming HomeLink for the first time the
factory test codes must be erased. To erase HomeLink
memory, press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons
(buttons one and three). The message CLEARING
CHANNELS will appear on the HomeLink display. After
approximately 20 seconds, the message CHANNELS
CLEARED will appear on the EVIC display. Do not hold
the buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicles engine while
programming HomeLink. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming HomeLink. Do not
program HomeLink if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause
serious injury or death to people and pets or damage
to objects.
145
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: It is recommended that a new battery be placed
in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate
transmission of the radio frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3

inches (5-14 cm) away from the lower left corner of the
EVIC display while keeping the display in view.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace the next step with procedures
noted in the Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
section.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button.
After a short time, the message TRAINING will show on
HomeLink display. Do not release the buttons until the
next step has been completed.
HomeLink Buttons
3. When the message TRAINED appears on the

HomeLink display, release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons.
NOTE: If the HomeLink display does not change to
TRAINED, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515 for assistance.
146
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button.

TRANSMIT should appear on the display.
If your device activates when the HomeLink button is
depressed and released, programming is complete.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, simply repeat the Programming HomeLink process.
If the message TRANSMIT appears on the HomeLink
display but your device does not activate, the device may
be equipped with a rolling code system. Continue with
steps five through seven below to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly
a garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the learn or smart button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
6. Firmly press and release the learn or smart button.

(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, simply repeat the Programming Homelink process.
If, after programming the HomeLink Wireless Control

System, the hand-held transmitter and/or other
HomeLink units in other vehicles fail to activate the
rolling code equipped device, you may need to clear (or
erase) the devices receiver memory. Refer to your
garage door openers Owners Manual for the procedure or contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on the
Internet at www.homelink.com. After clearing the receiver, you must reprogram the original hand-held
transmitter(s) to the receiver using the procedure in the
garage door openers Owners Manual. Finally, reprogram the hand-held transmitter(s) to HomeLink using
the steps under Programming HomeLink.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission - which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
147
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to time-out in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the Programming HomeLink procedures (regardless of where you
live), replace step two with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating.
Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press
and release - every two seconds (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter button until the radio signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The message
TRAINED will appear on the HomeLink display.)
Proceed with the remaining steps under Programming
HomeLink to complete.
148
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof control is located on the headliner between
the sun visors.
Press and hold the switch rearward to fully open the
sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any position
between closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature,
causing the sunroof to open automatically.
Sunroof Switch (w/o Console)
149
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial

vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
Express Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
Sunroof Switch (w/Console)
Press and hold the V button in the center of the sunroof

switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at
any position between closed and full vent. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward

position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again. The
sunroof is not completely closed until the rear of the
sunroof glass moves upward at the end of its travel.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
150
WARNING!
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
POWER OUTLET
To the right of the convenience tray (lower center of
instrument panel) is an outlet for electrically powered
accessories. Pull lightly on the top of the plastic cover to
open the outlet.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Front Power Outlet
There is a rear power outlet located in the right rear cargo

area above the storage cargo net/CD changer (if
equipped).
151
The rear power outlet is a direct feed from the battery so

it receives power whether the ignition is in the ON or
OFF position.
All accessories connected to this outlet should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use.
Rear Power Outlet
152
CAUTION!
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicles battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicles battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicles battery.
CUP HOLDERS
In the center console there are two cup holders for the
front seat passengers.
Front Cup Holders
NOTE: The front cup holder insert is removable from

the console, for cleaning.
153
Smokers Package If Equipped

With the optional Smokers package, a removable ash
tray is inserted into the front cup holder location.
The rear passengers have access to a cup holder on each
rear door trim panel.
Rear Cup Holders
154
CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Light
The cargo area light is activated by opening the swing
gate, opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control
on the multi-function control lever to the extreme top
position. If all doors are closed and only the swing gate is
open, pushing on the cargo light lens surface will turn off
all interior lights. Push on the lens surface a second time
to restore the interior lights to normal operation.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The swing gate may be opened or closed with the
cargo cover in place.
Rear Cargo Cover
155
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

The tie-downs located on cargo area floor should be used
to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
156
WARNING!
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A rotary ring switch on the control lever, located on the
right side of the steering column, controls operation of
the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating the center of
the switch up to the DEL (Delay) position or the ON
position will activate the wiper. Rotating the switch ring
beyond the ON or OFF position will activate the rear
washer. The wash pump will continue to operate as long
as the lever or ring is engaged. Upon release, the wipers
will cycle three times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the Park
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the switch is set
at.
If the swing gate flip-up window is open or the swing
gate is open, connection to the rear window wiper is
157
interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade.

When the swing gate flip-up window or the swing gate is
closed, the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs
to be turned OFF, and then to ON to restart the rear
wiper.
NOTE: The rear swing gate will lock while the rear
wiper is operating. The gate will stay locked until the
wiper is turned off and the gate is unlocked (by key,
lock switch, or key fob).
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the passenger side and
should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds
to flush out the residual water.
158
Rear Window Defroster

On the top of the climate control panel is a push
button for rear window defrosting. An amber
indicator in the push button will light when the defroster
is turned on. Push again to turn off the defroster prior to
an automatic time-out.
The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten

minutes. For about five more minutes of operation, push
the button again. To prevent excessive battery drain, use
the defroster only when the engine is operating. The push
button also activates the heated exterior mirrors, if so
equipped.
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all
objects a safe distance from the window to prevent
damaging the heating elements.
Rear Defroster Switch
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK

External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity as
shown on the label attached to the drivers door shut face.
159
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
160
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Sales Code RBK AM/ FM Stereo Radio

With CD Player And CD Changer Controls . . . . 177
Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
CD Changer Control Capability
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Sales Code RBQAM/FM Stereo Radio With 6 Disc CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
162
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Sales Code RB1 AM/FM Stereo Radio With
DVD/GPS Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6Disc Remote CD Changer If Equipped . . . . 194
Loading The CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Satellite Radio If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB, RAH And RBK
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1

And RBQ Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 198
Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
PTY Button Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
PTY Button Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped . . 200
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CD Player Single Disc In Radio . . . . . . . . . 201
163
CD Player 6 Disc In Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . 201
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System 203
Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 202
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
164
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
165
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
166
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION

1. Tachometer
Indicates the permissible engine revolutions-per-minute
for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up
on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
2. Turn Signal Indicator Light
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signals, when using the multi-function control
lever. A chime will sound if the turn signals are left on
continuously for 2 miles (3 km) until they are deactivated.
3. High Beam Indicator Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the multi-function control lever towards the steering wheel to switch the headlights from
high to low beam.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates, you should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them

to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected.
The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the
fault condition is removed and reset.
167
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
6. 4LO Mode Indicator Light If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4 LO fourwheel drive mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
168
7. Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped

This light shows when the front fog lights are on.
8. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD II which monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the ignition key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such has a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving cycles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the Malfunction Indicator

Light may flash to alert of serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
9. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as three
seconds.
If the light comes back on immediately or comes on
during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of
the brake system is not functioning and that service is
required, however, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE
warning light is not on. Also, a chime will sound if the
light comes back on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The operation of the ABS light can be checked by turning
the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON
position. The light should illuminate for approximately
four seconds. The light should then turn off unless a
brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
10. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on for three
seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If the light
comes back on immediately or comes on while driving, it
means that there is a problem with the charging system
or the battery is low. Also, a chime will sound if the light
comes back on. See your authorized dealer immediately.
169
11. Temperature Gage

Indicates engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gage pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature
(above center scale) when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, in heavy stop and go traffic, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
If the pointer rises to the red zone (five chimes will
occur), pull over and stop the vehicle. Do not turn the
engine off. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioning
turned off, until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the engine remains in the high range, turn the
engine off and call for service.
12. Reset Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and trip
odometer display. When in the trip odometer mode,
170
holding the button in resets the trip odometer. Also,

pressing the Reset button will clear out any warning
messages in the odometer display.
13. Odometer/Trip Odometer
A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster will display,
replacing the odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning
messages such as: door/gate/glass ajar and low washer
fluid. See appropriate sections for more information.
console, the warnings door, GATE, GLASS, and
LOWASH will be displayed in the EVIC display (not in
the instrument cluster). For additional information, refer
to Overhead Console If Equipped in Section 3.
NOTE: The warnings LOCOOL and GASCAP will
always be displayed in the odometer display.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of

vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
14. Cruise Indicator Light
This indicator lights when the speed control
system is turned ON.
15. Oil Pressure Warning Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come
on and remain on when the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
not come on, have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
If the warning light comes on and remains on while

driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO
NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS
CORRECTED. Also, a single chime will sound.
16. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with
severe usage such as trailer towing or snow plowing. If
this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at
idle or faster, with the transmission in N (Neutral) until
the light goes off.
17. Part Time Indicator Light If Equipped
the PART TIME fourwheel drive high range
mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
171
18. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the light comes on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, or there
is a low brake fluid level. On vehicles equipped with
Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), it may also indicate an ABS
malfunction that could lead to reduced braking performance.
172
WARNING!
Also, the light will come on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Driving a vehicle with the BRAKE warning light on

is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
have an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
The operation of the BRAKE warning light can be

checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON position. The light should illuminate
for approximately two seconds. The light should then
turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
If the parking brake is off and the light remains on, have
the brake system inspected as soon as possible.
19. Full Time Indicator Light If Equipped
the FULL TIME fourwheel drive mode, and
employs the inter-axle differential which allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds.
20. Sentry Key/Security Alarm Indicator Light If
Equipped
Refer to Sentry Key Immobilizer System or Vehicle
Security Alarm in Section 2 of this manual for more
information.
21. Fuel Gage

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the pointer
will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. A
small arrow indicates the side of the vehicle where the
filler cap (gas cap) is located.
22. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.3 U.S.
Gallons (8.7 Liters) this light will come on and
remain on until fuel is added. The Low Fuel
Warning Light may turn on and off again, especially
during and after hard braking, accelerations, or turns.
This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank.
Also, a single chime will sound.
23. Airbag Warning Light
This indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition is first turned on. If the
173
light doesnt come on, stays on, or comes on while

driving, have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer.
24. O/D (Overdrive) Off Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when the O/D OFF
button has been selected. The O/D OFF button is
located on the gear shift lever.
25. Seat Belt Indicator Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the drivers seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash
or remain on continuously. Refer to Enhanced Driver
Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) in the Occupant
Restraints section for more information.
174
26. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

If Equipped
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control System. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the gear
selector is placed in the P (Park) position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable, however,
see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated / rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on

during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: Two-footed driving is not recommended. Inadvertently driving with the brake pedal depressed for
more than a few seconds when the accelerator pedal is
held in place can cause the ETC system to assume that a
stuck accelerator pedal has occurred. This will result in a
loss of power. Returning the brake pedal to its normal
position or moving the accelerator pedal will cancel this
condition. If the depressed brake pedal and the constant
accelerator pedal position are maintained for an extended
period of time, the ETC warning light will begin to flash
and continue until the ignition switch is cycled in the
same manner as above.
27. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning

Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light If
Equipped
The ESP/BAS warning light in the instrument
cluster comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. The light should
go out with the engine running. If the ESP/
BAS warning light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either
the ESP or the BAS system. If this light stays illuminated,
have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Refer to Electronic Brake Control
System in Section 5 for more information.
175
28. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator

Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS if
equipped. The indicator light will flash when the ESP or
TCS System is active and helping to improve vehicle
stability. If the indicator light is on solid, ESP or TCS may
not be able to function normally. Refer to Electronic
Brake Control System in Section 5 for more information.
176
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position and the time button is pressed.
Radio Broadcast Signals

Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these apparent malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when

the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is
accurately maintained.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position
and press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint pen
or similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio.
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set
minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
Two Types of Signals

There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
177
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition

switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
SALES CODE RBK AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER
CONTROLS
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
RBK Radio
178
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up or the bottom to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding the button in will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the

button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the 15
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5
seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset
button is used a corresponding button number will be
displayed.
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADE.
179
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be

displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.

Press the SEEK + or SEEK to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be

displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be

sound level from the right or left side speakers.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
180
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,

2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the users authority to operate the equipment.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 34 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
CD Player Operation
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

OFF, the display will show the time of day.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
EJT Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF
(except on convertibles).
181
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Random Play RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on
the selected disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the
182
Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if

equipped) is selected SAT will appear in your radio
display.
Disc Up/Program Button 1

Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the

Satellite mode.
Disc Down/Program Button 5

Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
previous disc.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
CD Changer Control Capability If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
Random Play (RND)

Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owners
Manual.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
183
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed

when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
Excessive vibration
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
Water condensation on optics
184
SALES CODE RBQAM/FM STEREO RADIO

WITH 6 - DISC CD CHANGER
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the PWR/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn
the volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between AM,
FM, the CD changer and Sirius Satellite Radio (if
equipped). The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
RBQ Radio
To select Sirius Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the

MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the current channel name and number will be
displayed for five seconds. The current program type and
channel number will then be displayed for five seconds.

The current channel name and number will then be
displayed until an action occurs. CDs may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pressed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
185
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET RND
button. SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
16 button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET RND button, the station
will continue to play but will not be locked into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the corresponding push-button twice. Every
time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will be displayed.
186
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADE.
Time Button
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.

Press the SEEK + or SEEK to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be

displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,

2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the users authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the Power / Volume control pushed ON
before the CD player will operate.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 34 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
187

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
LOAD/ EJT Load
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD is being loaded.
After the radio displays load insert the CD into the
player.
Radio display will show loading when it is being
loaded.
LOAD / EJT Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the
disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy
removal.
188
Radio display will show ejecting when it is being

ejected.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CDs in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and
there are no other CDs in the radio, the radio will return
to the last selected AM or FM mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Scan
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Random Play SET / RND
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the SET / RND button a second time to stop
Random Play.
PTY (Program Type) Button

Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
repeatedly within 5 seconds will allow the program
format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not
currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency
Emergency Test
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
ALERT!
Test
Program Type
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Radio Display
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
189
190
Program Type
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is

displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
The radio display will flash SEEK and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
By pressing the SCAN button when the PTY icon is

displayed, the radio will stop at every PTY station on the
band and list each corresponding program type in the
radio display.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owners
Manual.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.

CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
191
SALES CODE RB1 AM/FM STEREO RADIO

WITH DVD/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CD ERROR will appear on the display if the laser is

unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
Warped disc
Excessive vibration
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
Water condensation on optics
RB1 Radio
The navigation system provides maps, turn identification, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
192
variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your Navigation Users Manual for detailed operating instructions.
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with the CD
Changer option, you will not be able to use the Navigation system and the CD Player simultaneously. Always
remove the Navigation DVD before inserting another
disc.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the systems clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
To manually set the clock, change the time zone, or
change daylight savings information, use a ball point pen
or similar object to press the hour (H) or minute (M)

buttons on the radio. The Setup screen appears.
Setting the Clock
1. Press the H button on the faceplate to change the hour
or the M button on the faceplate to change the minute.
The setting will increase each time you press the button.
Holding either button in will fast forward the setting.
2. If no changes are made within 5 seconds of accessing
the Setup screen, the screen will time out and you will be
taken to the last mode.
NOTE: To reset the clock, select the appropriate time
zone and press ENTER. The clock will revert to the
accurate time based on the time zone you selected.
Changing Time Zone
1. Highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER.
193
2. At the Clock Setup screen highlight the box next to

Time Zone and press ENTER.
2. Select Daylight Savings when Daylight Savings Time

is in effect.
3. Highlight the appropriate time zone for you location

and press ENTER to store your selection.
3. Select Standard if Daylight Savings Time is not being

observed.
4. Select Done when finished.
4. Press ENTER.
NOTE: When you are traveling and enter a new time

zone, the clock must be reset manually for the new zone.
5. Select Done when finished.
Changing Daylight Savings

1. Highlight the box next to Time and press ENTER.
6. Select Done to exit from the clock setting mode.
194
6DISC REMOTE CD CHANGER IF EQUIPPED

Loading the CD Changer
Removing the CD Changer Magazine
NOTE: Always keep the CD changer door closed except
when ejecting or installing the magazines. The door is
designed to keep dust, dirt, and foreign objects out of the
CD changer. Handle the magazine with reasonable care.
The magazine may crack if dropped or knocked against a
hard surface.
1. Slide the CD changer door all the way to the right.

2. Press the green EJECT button.
3. Gently remove the magazine by pulling it out of the
CD changer.
195
4. Close the CD changer door by sliding it to the left.
Installing the CD Changer Magazine
Loading Discs into the Magazine

Gently pull out a tray from the magazine, and place the
disc with the label as indicated on the top of the
magazine (up to 6 discs). Slide the tray into the magazine
until it locks in place. Do not remove the trays from the
magazine. If the discs are installed upside down CD
Err will be displayed on the radio.
1. Slide the CD changer door all the way to the right to

access the magazine slot.
NOTE: Do not use 3 inch (8 cm) discs in the magazine.

If a CD adaptor for 3 inch (8 cm) discs is used, the disc
will not be ejected.
SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED

Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Removing Discs from the Magazine

To remove the disc, gently pull out the desired disc tray
from the magazine and remove the disc. Slide the tray
back into the magazine until it locks in place.
NOTE: Do not attempt to disassemble the magazine.
2. Insert the magazine into the changer slot in the

direction of the arrow on the magazine.
3. Slide the changer door to the left to close the changer
door.
196
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With RBB, RAH and RBK Radios

With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depending on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously
for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit
ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP
button to display the next four digits. Continue to press
the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have
been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and
RBQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is

turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH and RBK
Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until S A appears in
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while
in the Satellite radio mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
and RBQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
SIRIUS appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
The current program type and channel number will
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
197
The current channel number will then be displayed

until an action occurs.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word SCAN will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
198
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content

can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button SCAN

When the desired program type is obtained, press the
SCAN button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the SCAN
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button SEEK
When the desired program is obtained, press the SEEK
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
199
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking

structure or under a physical obstacle.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
200
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF

EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a

push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/
CD, Etc.).
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will Seek down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset push-button.
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch switches
the side of the tape to be played.
201
CD Player Single Disc in Radio

track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD Player 6 Disc in Cargo Area
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
202

second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch will cause
the CD changer to play the next available disc in the
6disc magazine.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
The controls for the heating, air conditioning, and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs, and a push-button. These comfort controls can be
set to obtain desired interior conditions.
203
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left controls the blower and can be
set in one of four positions from Low to High.
Temperature Control
The degree of comfort can be selected by rotating the
temperature control knob on the right. The coldest temperature setting is fully counterclockwise and the warmest setting fully clockwise. The knob can be positioned at
any detent.
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control
at any speed and press the snowflake button
located on the control panel. Conditioned air will
be directed through the outlets selected by the mode
control. A light in the snowflake button shows that the air
conditioning is on.
Manual Climate Control
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed

when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
204
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and

off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
Mode Control
The mode selector (the center rotary knob and the
push-button above it) can be set in any of the following
positions:
OFF
This position turns off the blower motor and outside
air will not pass through any outlets.
Recirculate (Max A/C)
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. Allows for circulation of
interior air only which will cool the cabin
faster. This setting can be used in very hot
weather to maximize the effect of the air conditioner. This
mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside
odors, smoke, and dust. Slight airflow from the floor

outlets and the defrost outlets, located at the base of the
windshield, may be noticed.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Slight airflow from the defrost outlet,
located at the base of the windshield, may be noticed.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel, on the floor, and in the rear of the center
console. Slight airflow from the defrost outlet, located at
the base of the windshield, may be noticed.
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and through the outlets located in the rear of the center console. Slight airflow from
the defrost outlet, located at the base of the windshield,
may be noticed. The air conditioning system has been
enabled in Floor mode to provide less humid air, especially when heat is used. This will help you reduce or
prevent window fogging in high humidity conditions.
This function cannot be disabled. You may still select the
desired amount of heat using the temperature control
dial. The heated air will simply be drier and less prone to
condensing on cold window surfaces.
Mix
Air flows through the floor outlets, the outlets at
the base of the windshield, and the side window
demisters outlets.
Defrost
Air flows through the outlets at the base of the
windshield and through the side window demister
outlets.
205
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when its rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
206
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.

Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Clutch Interlocking Ignition System . . . . . . . . 216
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
6-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Automatic Transmission If Equipped . . . . . . . 220
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 220
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20F (29C) . . 212
Automatic Transmission With Overdrive . . . . . 221
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Command-Trac Operating
Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Engine Block Heater If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 215

Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
208
Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Selec-Trac Operating Information/Precautions

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Trac-Lok Rear Axle If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 234
On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
When To Use 4L Or 4LO (Low) Range . . . . . . 235
Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . 237
Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Anti-Lock Brake System If Equipped . . . . . . . 241

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 248
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Tires General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . 256
Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
209
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fuel Requirements (Gasoline Engines) . . . . . . . . 273
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 262
Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Base System If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Base System With Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Premium System If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 268

Check TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
210
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 296
Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Towing 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Trailer Towing Weights

(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 287
Towing 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
211
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
in N (Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal before
starting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch
interlocking ignition system, which requires the clutch to
be fully depressed before starting the vehicle.
4WD Models Only
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether
or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
start when in 4L without having to depress the clutch
pedal. The 4 LO MODE indicator light will illuminate
when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the selector lever in the N (Neutral)
or P (Park) position. Apply the brake before shifting to
any driving range.
212
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission

shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.
Ignition Key Positions
Extreme Cold Weather (below 20F (29C)

To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
213
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
214
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will decrease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
215
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine
(3.7L Engines).
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
5
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt AC electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0F (-18C) are
expected to last for several days.
216
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Clutch Interlocking Ignition System
2WD Models Only Manual transmission vehicles are
equipped with a clutch interlock safety feature. The
clutch pedal must be fully depressed to allow cranking of
the engine.
4WD Models Only The exception to this clutch interlock is 4WD models equipped with a manual transmission. For these models, the clutch interlock feature is
overridden when the vehicle is operated in 4L to enhance
off-road capability. Refer to Starting Procedures
Manual Transmission (4WD Models Only) in this section.
6-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
Follow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob.
NOTE: The backup lights will come on when your
vehicle is in R (Reverse) gear and the ignition is in the ON
position.
217
WARNING!
When parking your vehicle, always leave a manual
transmission in first gear and apply the parking
brake fully to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage. Never use any gear as a
substitute for the parking brake.
CAUTION!
Manual Shift Controls
To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the life

of your manual transmission, follow these tips:
Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse, or
from reverse to a forward gear, stop vehicle completely. Otherwise, accelerated transmission wear may
result.
218
Do not operate at sustained high engine or road

speeds in lower gears. Engine damage may result.
Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at too
high a speed for that gear. Engine, clutch, or transmission damage may result.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This causes
heat buildup and damages the clutch.
When you slow down or go up a grade, downshift as
speed requires or the engine may overheat.
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the
clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged.
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting.
Otherwise, transmission or clutch damage may result.
When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between a

forward gear and reverse, do not spin wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Recommended Manual Transmission Shifting
Speeds
The manufacturer recommends that you use the shift
speeds listed in the chart below.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
EnSpeeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
gine
3.7L
Accel. 15 (24)
24
34
47
56
(39)
(55)
(76)
(90)
Cruise 10 (16)
19
27
37
41
(31)
(43)
(60)
(66)
Recommended Manual Transmission Downshifting

Speeds
To prevent clutch and transmission damage, your vehicle
should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those
listed in the chart below:
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH
(KM/H)
Gear
6th to
5th to
4th to 3rd to 2nd to
Selec5th
4th
3rd
2nd
1st
tion
Maxi- 90 mph 75 mph 50 mph 35 mph 20 mph
mum
(144
(120
(80
(56
(32
Speed km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h)
219
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the recommended downshifting
speeds may cause the engine to over speed and/or
damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is
depressed.
220
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
Shift into P (Park) only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
Do not shift from R (Reverse), P (Park), or N
(Neutral) into any forward gear when the engine
is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
(Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of P (Park) and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of P
(Park).
Automatic Transmission with Overdrive

Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
shift lever between these gears.
221
Gear Ranges
P (Park)
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first,
then place the selector in P (Park) position.
5
WARNING!
Never use P (Park) position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Automatic Shift Controls
222
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
(Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
R (Reverse)
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
N (Neutral)
Shift into N (Neutral) when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N (Neutral) can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to Recreational
Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in
Section 6 of this manual.
Overdrive (O/D)
For most city and highway driving. The transmission
contains an electronically controlled Overdrive, and will
automatically shift from D (Drive) to O/D (Overdrive) if
the following conditions are present:
The transmission selector is in D (Drive).
The O/D OFF button has not been activated.
223
Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48

km/h).
Transmission has reached normal operating temperature.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
Overdrive, such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy load conditions (for example, in hilly terrain,
strong head winds, or trailer towing), turning off overdrive will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
5
O/D Off Button
Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O/D OFF

button located on side of the gearshift lever. The O/D
OFF indicator light will illuminate to show that the
switch has been activated. When the indicator light is on,
Overdrive is locked out. Pressing the switch a second
224
time restores the Overdrive function. The lockout feature

is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in cold outside temperatures, shifts into Overdrive may be delayed. Normal
Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the
temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate
temperature. Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or engage
overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission
cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive will resume
normal operation.
2 (Second)
For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow. Begins at a stop in low gear
with automatic upshift to 2nd gear. Will not shift to 3rd.
1 (First)
For hard pulling at low speeds in mud, sand, snow, or on
steep grades. Begins and stays in low gear with no
upshift. Provides engine compression braking at low
speeds.
CAUTION!
Never press on the accelerator pedal with the engine running, vehicle in gear, and the brakes applied. Always apply the brakes when stopped on a
incline. Failure to follow these instructions can
cause overheating and damage to the transmission.
When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between First and R (Reverse), do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Over Temperature Mode

The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission gets too
hot, the transmission will change the way it shifts to help
control the condition. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
D (Drive) position. If the transmission becomes hot
enough the TRANS TEMP warning light in the instrument cluster will come on. After the transmission cools
down, it will return to normal operation.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
225
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch (TCC) will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
warm (usually after 13 miles (1.64.8 km) of driving)
and the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h). To understand the difference in operation,
drive the vehicle so that TCC engagement conditions
are correct, and then press and release the O/D OFF
button once to disengage the TCC. Wait a few seconds,
and then press and release the O/D OFF button
again to engage the TCC. You will notice that the
engine runs at a higher RPM when driving at vehicle
speeds above approximately 30 mph (48 km/h) with
the TCC not engaged. This is a normal condition.
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
226
normal condition and will not cause damage to the

transmission. The torque converter will refill within 5
seconds of shifting from P (Park) into any other gear
position.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Command-Trac Operating
Information/Precautions
The Command-Trac transfer case provides 4 mode
positions - 2 (rear) wheel drive high range, 4-wheel drive
high range, neutral, and 4-wheel drive low range.
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2-wheel
drive position (2H) for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required the transfer case 4H
and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
simply moving the shift lever to these positions. The 4H

and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
The PART TIME indicator light, located in the instrument
cluster, illuminates when the transfer case is shifted to the
4H position.
The 4 LO MODE indicator light, located in the instrument cluster, illuminates when the transfer case is shifted
to the 4L position. There is no light for the 2H or N
(Neutral) positions.
227
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the

front or rear wheels are spinning. The CommandTrac transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2H
or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h).
Because 4-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and
stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the
vehicle to move despite the transmission position.
The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Proper operation of 4-wheel drive vehicles depends on

tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can
cause damage to the transfer case.
228
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
4H
4-Wheel-Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 for more information.
4L
4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h). (Allows engine starting without depressing
the clutch pedal on vehicles equipped with manual
transmission. Refer to Starting Procedures Manual
Transmission (4WD Models Only) in this section.
Shifting Procedure
2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle in motion up to 55 mph (88 km/h). The transfer
case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift.
Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case
lever.
4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or depress the
clutch on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case N (Neutral).
NOTE: To shift from 4H to 4L, the shift lever should
pushed away from the driver, and then rearward into 4L.
In 4H, there is a neutral stop to prevent shifting into N
(Neutral) by accident.
NOTE: Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift automatic
transmission to N (Neutral), hold foot on brake, and turn
engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
229
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the

vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5
km/h).
Selec-Trac Operating Information/Precautions
If Equipped
The Selec-Trac transfer case provides 5 mode positions normal 2-wheel drive mode, part-time 4-wheel drive
high range, full-time 4-wheel drive high range, neutral,
and 4-wheel drive low range.
This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differential which allows driving the vehicle in the 4 FULL
TIME position at all times on any given road surface
230
including dry hard surfaced roads. The 4 FULL TIME

mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds which eliminates driveline binding and
component wear that is normally associated with driving
the vehicle in the 4 PART TIME position on dry hard
surfaced roads. This feature provides the safety, security,
and convenience of operating in 4wheel drive at all
times regardless of road conditions.
When additional traction is required the 4 PART TIME
and 4LO positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together through the transfer case inter-axle
differential and force the front and rear driveshafts to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply
moving the shift lever to these positions. The 4 PART
TIME and 4LO positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4 PART TIME and 4LO
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
The PART TIME indicator light, located on the instrument cluster, illuminates when the transfer case is shifted
to the 4 PART TIME position.
The FULL TIME indicator light, located on the instrument cluster, illuminates when the transfer case is shifted
to the 4 FULL TIME position.
The 4LO MODE indicator light, located on the instrument cluster, illuminates when the transfer case is shifted
to the 4LO position. There is no light for the 2WD, or N
(Neutral) positions.
231
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the

front or rear wheels are spinning. The Selec-Trac
transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer
and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds
must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting
while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the
2WD, 4 PART TIME, or 4 FULL TIME positions at
a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Because 4-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and
stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the
vehicle to move regardless of the transmission
position. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Proper operation of 4-wheel drive vehicles depends on

tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
can cause damage to the transfer case.
232
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
4 PART TIME
Part Time 4Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the transfer
case inter-axle differential. Forces the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4 FULL TIME
Full Time 4-Wheel Drive High Range - Employs an
inter-axle differential. This allows front and rear wheels
to rotate at different speeds, on all road surfaces.
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 for more information.
4LO
Part Time 4Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed
4wheel drive. Locks the transfer case inter-axle differential. Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Shifting Procedure
2WD to 4 PART TIME or 4 PART TIME to 2WD
Shifting between 2WD and 4 PART TIME can be made
with the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in
motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With
the vehicle in motion two momentary releases of the
accelerator pedal may be required after shifting. This will

induce a torque interrupt and allow full engagement of
the newly selected position. With the vehicle stationary it
may be necessary to shift the automatic transmission
from D (Drive) to R (Reverse) and back to D (Drive) after
shifting. This will allow full engagement of the newly
selected position. Apply a constant force when shifting
the transfer case lever.
4 PART TIME to 4 FULL TIME or 4 FULL TIME to
4 PART TIME
Shifting between 4 PART TIME and 4 FULL TIME can be
made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle
is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h).
With the vehicle in motion two momentary releases of the
accelerator pedal may be required after shifting. This will
induce a torque interrupt and allow full engagement of
the newly selected position. With the vehicle stationary it
may be necessary to shift the automatic transmission
from D (Drive) to R (Reverse) and back to D (Drive) after
233
shifting. This will allow full engagement of the newly

selected position. Apply a constant force when shifting
the transfer case lever.
4 FULL TIME to 4 LO or 4 LO to 4 FULL TIME
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission to N (Neutral). While the
vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not
pause in transfer case N (Neutral).
NOTE: To shift from 4 FULL TIME to 4LO, the shift
lever should be pushed away from the driver, and then
rearward into 4LO. In 4 FULL TIME, there is a neutral
stop to prevent shifting into N (Neutral) by accident.
NOTE: Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
234
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift transmission to N (Neutral), hold foot on brake, and turn engine
OFF. Make shift to desired mode.
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4LO is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4LO
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5
km/h).
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED

The optional Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant
driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin
caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel. If
traction differs between the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by
providing more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction. When starting with only one rear wheel on
an excessively slippery surface, slight application of the
parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to
lose control of your vehicle.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
235
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than lowslung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4L or 4LO (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4L or 4LO for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand
where additional low speed pulling power is needed.
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4L or 4LO range.
236
Driving Through Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches deep will
require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try
to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and
location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than

5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches. The
flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches,
and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches of water is less than 5
mph (8 km/h).
237
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Hill Climbing
Driving In Snow, Mud and Sand

In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO if necessary.
Refer to Four-Wheel Drive Operation in this section.
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a

steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and
shift to R (Reverse). Back slowly down the hill allowing
the compression braking of the engine to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the

conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO. Use
first gear and 4L or 4LO for very steep hills.
238
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in R (Reverse) gear. Never
back down a hill in N (Neutral) using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill-always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer
case to 4L or 4LO range. Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have brake rotors, wheels,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.
239
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You
might not have full braking power when you need it
to prevent an accident. If you have been operating
your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes
checked and cleaned as necessary.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
240
PARKING BRAKE
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull
up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
NOTE: The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
the vehicle.
Parking Brake
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and the
gear shift lever is in the P (Park) position (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse) or 1st gear (manual transmission). When parking on a hill, you should apply the parking
brake before placing the gear shift lever in P (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of P (Park).
WARNING!
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in P (Park), a manual transmission in R
(Reverse) or 1st gear. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake or the gear selector lever. Dont
leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving, failure to do so can lead to brake problems
due to excessive heating of the rear brakes.
241
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the

curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED
The Anti-Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
242
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
During off-road use, loss of traction can temporarily

defeat the system and cause the warning light to illuminate. Turn the ignition OFF and ON again to restore
Anti-Lock Brake System function.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason, your
foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
the self-test and during an ABS stop to provide the
regulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes a
low humming noise during operation, this is normal.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
243
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the users safety
or the safety of others.
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible

detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake
System is functioning.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
244
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced power steering

assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering

wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
CAUTION!
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering

pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the

end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
WARNING!
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings
245
European Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact

spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter T
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
246
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
R means Radial Construction.
D means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
247
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions.
The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted
speed limits).
Load Identification:
....blank.... = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
248
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
01 means the year 2001.
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
249
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars is listed on either the face of the drivers door
or the drivers side B pillar. For vehicles other than
passenger cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed
on either the shutface of the drivers door, the B pillar,
the Certification Label or in the Tire Inflation Pressures
brochure in the glove compartment.
5
250
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire and Loading Information
This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs. on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on
your vehicles placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 750 = 650 lb.)
251
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392 Kg).
252
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
253
1. Safety
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
Over inflation reduces a tires ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that
results in tire failure.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You
could lose control of your vehicle.
Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the
other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire properly inflated.
254
2. Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either
the face of the drivers door, or the drivers side B pillar.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as

inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
255
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement

when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
CAUTION!
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12 F (7 C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem capif equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Example: If garage temperature = 68 F (20 C) and the

outside temperature = 32 F (0 C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 F (7 C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
256
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Dont drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicles wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
257
Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicles wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do
not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what
the speed.
258
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.
259
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
260
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Alignment and Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
Fast tire wear.
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided wear.
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right.
Alignment will not correct this problem. See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and
other suspension components, it is important that only
chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can
cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use.
Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible
and then retighten after driving about 12 mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the tire chain manufacturers instructions on
the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested operating
speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the
speed recommended by the manufacture.
Tire chains that are recommended for this vehicle are

listed below:
Mopar P/N 82206828 with P235/70R16 and P235/
65R17 tires.
Mopar P/N 82207074 with P215/75R16 tires.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturers
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
261
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
262
NOTE: The Premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will

automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the forward-cross
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (11C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
3 hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to
the Tires General Information in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicles
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire

pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure. Once the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light has been illuminated, the tire
pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire
pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light to be turned off. The system will automatically update, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
263
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold

(parked for more than 3 hours) tire pressure of 33 psi (227
kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68F (20C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20F (-7C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicles recommended cold tire pressure
value.
NOTE: Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
264
Base System If Equipped

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
Receiver Module
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size

spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. The audible
chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each
condition that it detects. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicles recommended cold tire pressure. The system
will automatically update, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information. A low spare tire will not cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash

on and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will
sound when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle
will repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime,
until the fault condition no longer exists. If the ignition
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists.
NOTE: In the event that the matching full size spare tire
is swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next
ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON, and a chime to
sound. Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as the spare tire or any other
road tire(s) are not below the low pressure warning
threshold.
265
CAUTION!
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
266
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Base System with Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) If Equipped
267
condition that it detects. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer.
Once the proper tire pressure is set, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will reset automatically after
driving the vehicle for at least 10 minutes at or above 15
mph (24 km/h).

spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a matching full

size spare tire, a low matching full size spare tire will set
the SPARE LOW PRESSURE text message, but it will
not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
illuminate or the chime to sound.


sound when a system fault is detected. In addition, the

Receiver Module
4 Wheel Sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to Section 4 of this manual.
268
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display

a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message. The flash cycle
until the fault condition no longer exists. If the ignition
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists.
Premium System If Equipped

Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON, and a chime to
sound. Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as the spare tire or any other
road tire(s) are not below the low pressure warning
threshold. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE text
message.

Receiver Module
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
condition that it detects. In addition, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display one or
more Low Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for 3 seconds, and a graphic display of
269
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing. Refer

to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
Section 4 of this manual.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a matching full
size spare tire, a low matching full size spare tire will set
the SPARE LOW PRESSURE text message, but it will
not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
illuminate or the chime to sound.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
270
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four

active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicles recommended cold tire pressure.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPM System
sound when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle
until the fault condition no longer exists. The EVIC will
display the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3
seconds. This text message is then followed by a graphic,
with - - displayed for the pressure value(s) indicating

which of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not
being received.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPA, or BAR.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM

text message will no longer display, and a pressure value
will be displayed instead of dashes.
Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON, a chime to sound, a
Low Pressure message to appear in the EVIC, and the
graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value
flashing. Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light as long as the matching full
size spare tire or any other road tire(s) are not below the
low pressure warning threshold. The EVIC will display a
Spare Low Pressure text message, and the graphic
display will show a new tire pressure value in place of
the flashing low tire pressure value.
271
CAUTION!
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
272
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS (GASOLINE ENGINES)

Your engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended. The use of
premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high
quality regular gasoline, and in some circumstances may
result in poorer performance.
Mid-grade gasoline (89 octane) will enhance engine performance during the following conditions:
Hot weather
Towing
Hard accelerations
Hilly terrain
Low humidity
273
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to

your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of regular gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers world wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.
274
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system

performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasoline without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
275
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles
performance:
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
276
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as

octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions

repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
277
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
drivers side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
5
CAUTION!
DO NOT put gasoline in your diesel vehicle (if
equipped). If you accidentally put gasoline in your
vehicle, DO NOT start the engine. This will cause
damage to the fuel system. Have the fuel system
flushed.
Fuel Filler Cap
278
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control

system could result from using an improper fuel cap
(gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top

off the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the

fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
279
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
cap is properly tightened. Refer to Onboard Diagnostic
System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
280
WARNING!
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the
tank filled.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the drivers side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the

bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the

system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicles GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
281
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
282
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted

from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
283
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
loaded and ready for operation condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum

front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
WARNING!
Tongue Weight (TW)

The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
284
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
theyre commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicles front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
285
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
Weight Distributing Hitch System
286
Trailer Hitch Classification

The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000
lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to
the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
See your dealer for package content.
Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
The following chart provides the industry standard for

the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification

Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
287
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on

your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
288
Engine/
Transmission
3.7L/6-Speed
Manual
3.7L/6-Speed
Manual
3.7L/
Automatic
3.7L/
Automatic
3.7L/
Automatic w/
Cooler
3.7L/
Automatic
w/Cooler
Model
4x2
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)

8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
4x4
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
4x2
7,150 lbs (3 243 kg)
4x4
7,400 lbs ( 3 356 kg)
4x2
9,850 lbs (4 468 kg)
4x4
10,100 lbs (4 581 kg)
Frontal Area
40 Sq. Ft. (3.72
square meters)
40 Sq. Ft. (3.72
square meters)
32 Sq. Ft. (2.97
square meters)
32 Sq. Ft. (2.97
square meters)
60 Sq. Ft. (5.57
square meters)
60 Sq. Ft. (5.57
square meters)
Max. GTW (Gross

Trailer Wt.)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.

(See Note 1)
350 lbs (159 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
289
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as

part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire
Safety Information section in this manual.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
290
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
291
Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the
transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.
Always, block or chock the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
292
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to the TiresGeneral
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to the TiresGeneral Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe

and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
TiresGeneral Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation

pressures before trailer usage.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with

a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
293
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
294
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7- Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
4 - Pin Connector
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,

all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Towing Tips Automatic Transmission
The D range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the 3 range
should be selected.
NOTE: Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule B in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
295
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level

before towing.
Towing Tips O/D OFF (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, press the O/D OFF button when driving in hilly
areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
more severe grades. Refer to Transmission Shifting in
this section.
Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
Dont use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
296
Towing Tips Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing 2WD Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. Towing with the
rear wheels on the ground can result in severe transmission damage.
Towing 4WD Models
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral), and the transmission must be shifted into P (Park)
297
(for automatic transmission) or into any forward gear (for

manual transmission) for recreational towing.
5. Shift automatic transmission into D (Drive) or manual

transmission into any forward gear.
Shifting Into Neutral (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
6. Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle

movement.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
7. Shut the engine OFF and place the ignition key into
the unlocked OFF position.
8. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park) or ensure
manual transmission is in any forward gear.
9. Apply parking brake.
10. Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar.
11. Release parking brake.
1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Shift transmission into N (Neutral).
3. Shift transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
4. Start engine.
298
CAUTION!
Transmission damage may occur if the automatic
transmission is shifted into P (Park) with the transfer
case in N (Neutral) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in N (Neutral) ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into P (Park)
(refer to steps 7 8 above).
Shifting Out Of Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Shift transmission into N (Neutral).
2. Turn engine off.
3. Shift transfer case lever to desired position.
4. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
5. Start engine.
6. Shift automatic transmission into D (Drive) or manual
transmission into any forward gear.
WARNING!
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
299
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on

your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other

aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped . . . . . . . . 311
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
2WD Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4WD Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
302
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

Your vehicles hazard warning flasher is an emergency
warning system. When you activate it, all front and rear
directional signals will flash intermittently. Use it when
your vehicle is disabled on or near the road. It warns
other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle. This
is an emergency warning system, not to be used when the
vehicle is in motion.
To activate the warning flashers, press the button on the
instrument panel (between center air outlets). To turn the
warning flashers off, press the button again.
Hazard Warning Switch
NOTE: With extended use, the flashers may run down

your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
303
If the pointer rises to the H (hot mark) on a vehicle, pull

over and stop the vehicle. Do not turn the engine off. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioning turned off, until the
pointer drops back into the normal range.
On the highways Slow down.

In city traffic While stopped, put transmission in N
(Neutral), but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
Control to maximum heat, the Mode Control to floor, and
the Fan Control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads H,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the H, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
If the overheating condition persists a continuous chime
will sound to alert the driver. Reduce the vehicle speed
and or stop the vehicle while allowing the engine to idle
and cool the engine.
304
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack, and tire changing tools are stored
beneath the right rear seat. To remove the jack from its
stowage position, turn the thumb screw counterclockwise to loosen jack assembly and then remove it.
Jack Storage Location
Spare Tire Stowage

To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire
cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench turning them counterclockwise.
305
NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the

spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross
weight of 50 lbs (23 kg) including the weight of the spare
tire.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place automatic transmission in P (Park), or manual transmission in
R (Reverse). Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING!
Spare Tire Mounting
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
306
Block both the front and rear

of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left
rear wheel.
4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front tires, place it in

the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be
changed. For the rear tires, place it under the axle by the
wheel to be changed. Position the jack handle on the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the

vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove spare tire.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket. Assemble the tools by connecting the driver to the extension, and then to the lug wrench.
Front Jacking Location
307
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.

Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install

lug nuts with cone-shaped end toward wheel. Lightly
tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle
off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
308
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct

wheel nut tightness is 130 Nm (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper locations.
JUMP STARTING
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the
battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure
carefully.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Dont lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. Do
not use a 24 volt power source.
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
309
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, place the automatic transmission in P
(Park) or the manual transmission in N (Neutral), and
turn the ignition OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
310
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal

of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode.
During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage
your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
311
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

2WD Models Only
Provided the transmission is operable, tow only in N
(Neutral) at speeds not exceeding 30 mph (48 km/h), for
distances of not more than 15 miles (24 km). Towing at
more than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 15 miles
(24 km) can cause severe transmission damage. If the
transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), tow with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on
a towing dolly. Removing the driveshaft for towing is not
recommended since this can allow fluid to drain from the
transmission.
312
4WD Models Only

The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle
raised and the other end on a towing dolly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS
Engine Compartment 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension . . 323
Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II . . . . . . . . 317
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Spark Plug Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Emissions Inspection And

Maintenance Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 327
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
314
Driveline And Steering Component

Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Appearance Care And Protection

From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fuse Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 338

Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Clutch Hydraulic System
Manual Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Head Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Front Fog Light (Front Fascia Mounted) . . . . . 364
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And

Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . 365
Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
315
Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 367

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
316
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.7L
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
317
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
7
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
GAS CAP message will be displayed in the odometer
(located on the instrument cluster). Replace, or tighten
318
the fuel filler cap properly to turn the message off (light
will time out). If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicles emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined

not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicles OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicles OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicles OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
319
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your

vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturers
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
320

against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it

could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicles engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine has been shut off, or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the ADD and SAFE markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1 U.S. Quart (0.95L) of oil when the
reading is at the ADD mark will result in a SAFE reading
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
321
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high

speeds during hot weather, above 90F (32C)
Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service)
Trailer towing
Off-road or desert driving
Change Engine Oil

Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if any apply to you:
Day or night temperatures are below 32F (0C)
Stop and go driving
Extensive engine idling
Driving in dusty conditions
Short trip driving of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine oil

at every interval shown in schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule A of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
322
Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil
filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil
viscosity for your vehicle.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only 0recommends
API Certified engine oils.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the

Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
323
Engine Oil Filter Selection

All of the manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension
At the mileage shown in the appropriate Maintenance
Schedule, check all drive belts for condition and proper
tension. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage
and failure.
Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is required, adjust the belts according to the specifications
and procedures shown in the Service Manual.
324
Special tools are required to properly measure tension

and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference
between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the mileage specified in the appropriate maintenance chart. The entire set should be replaced if there is
any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in the engine compartment for spark plug information.
Spark Plug Wires
The spark plug wires should be kept clean and properly
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,
damaged, or faulty wires should be replaced.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule A. If,
however, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or
severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected
periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals
shown on Maintenance Schedule B.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
converter as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
325
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
against you.
326
WARNING!
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter

damage:
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over

materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifications, should be obtained immediately.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Crankcase Emission Control System

Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
327
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Dont allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Dont lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Dont use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Dont allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Always wash
hands after handling the battery.
328
CAUTION!
To determine the battery charge, check the battery test

indicator (if equipped) on top of the battery. Refer to the
illustration.
It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case.
If a fast charger is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a fast charger to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
329
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
additional warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
330
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with
the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts,
and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only the manufacturers recommended
fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
NOTE: Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short period of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system.
This noise should be considered normal, and does not in
any way damage the steering system.
Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication

U-joints (cardan joints) are sealed and do not require
lubrication. Prop shafts, yokes, ball joints and other
driveline and steering components may be provided with
grease fittings for lubrication. Lubrication of these components at the intervals specified in the appropriate
Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 is very important,
particularly if your vehicle is subjected to off-road or
other heavy-duty use. See your authorized dealer for
complete service information.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, swing gate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
331
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
332
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the passenger side and
should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
antifreeze/coolant) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
333
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze/
coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, dont open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check antifreeze/coolant protection every 12 months
(before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable).
If antifreeze/coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
antifreeze/coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser
(if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
334
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a

garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
Cooling System Drain, Flush, And Refill
At the intervals shown on the appropriate Maintenance
Schedule the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled.
If the coolant solution is dirty or contains a considerable

amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable
cooling system cleaner (see your authorized dealer for
recommendations). Follow with a thorough rinsing to
remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of
old antifreeze/coolant solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended antifreeze/
coolant, refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for
correct antifreeze/coolant type.
CAUTION!
Mixing of antifreeze/coolant other than the specified HOAT antifreeze/coolant may result in decreased corrosion protection and engine damage.
If a non-HOAT antifreeze/coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, it should
be replaced with the specified antifreeze/coolant
as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
antifreeze/coolant products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may
not be compatible with the antifreeze/coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based antifreeze/coolant. Use of
Propylene Glycol base antifreeze/coolant is not
recommended.
335
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze/
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
antifreeze/coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000
miles before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same antifreeze/coolant throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding antifreeze/coolant, a minimum solution of
50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures
below -34F (-37C) are anticipated.
336
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized

water when mixing the water/antifreeze (coolant) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
Please note that it is the owners responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing antifreeze/coolant types will decrease
the life of the antifreeze/coolant and will require more
frequent antifreeze/coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
antifreeze/coolant, and to insure that antifreeze/coolant
will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery
bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add antifreeze/coolant when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant

Used Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
antifreeze/coolant is a regulated substance requiring
proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your community. To
prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store
HOAT antifreeze/coolant in open containers, or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant recovery bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the antifreeze/coolant level
is adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the antifreeze/coolant
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
337
antifreeze/coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month.
When additional antifreeze/coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
recovery bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot water to
enter the radiator.
338
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. Also, if your

vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the
front of the condenser clean.
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Check antifreeze/coolant freeze point in the system.

If frequent antifreeze/coolant additions are required,
or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop
when the engine cools, the cooling system should be
pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant/anti-freeze concentration to
50% HOAT engine coolant/anti-freeze (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses

Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
339
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or

collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps
and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks
are present. Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could
cause failure.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the appropriate Maintenance Schedule in
Section 8 for suggested service intervals.
Fuel System Connections

Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
WARNING!
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified

tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldnt have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake and Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears,
340
cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to
examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat
sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil
change.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they

are secure and no leaks are present.
WARNING!
NOTE: Often fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,

and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before hose is replaced based
on leakage.
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.

You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Brake Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the Brake Warning Light shows system failure.
341
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be

expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be
needed.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
342
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter. Do
not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake
fluid as seal damage will result.
Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission
Only
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
system must be replaced.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid

The front axle has a threaded fill plug on the cover
plate, and a threaded drain plug on the bottom side of
the carrier.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be 1/2 (1 cm) below the oil fill hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturers recommended fluid, refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
343
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
removing the fill plug (B) located at the back of the
transfer case.
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.
Adding Fluid
Only at filler hole until fluid runs out of the hole, when
the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug (B), then drain plug (C). Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
1525 ft. lbs. (2034 Nm).
344
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Use only manufacturers recommended fluid, refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Manual Transmission
Use only manufacturers recommended manual transmission fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 (4.76 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
lubricant has become contaminated with water. If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately.
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
345
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level should be checked when the engine is
fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is
heated to its normal operating temperature. Operation of
the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly
reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid.
346
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,

the following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Apply the brakes and shift the transmission into P
(Park).
5. The fluid MUST be checked with the transmission in
P (Park) to be sure that the fluid level is accurate.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
At normal operating temperature (approximately 180 F
(82 C), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region
(cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid

level indicator should be in the COLD region at 70 F (21
C) fluid temperature.
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid to bring to the
proper level. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Fluid is added through the dipstick tube.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated.
Special Additives
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of
any additives to the transmission. Exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks.
Maintenance After Off-Road Driving

After extended operation in mud, sand or water, or
similar dirty conditions, have your brake drums, brake
linings, and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible. This will prevent any abrasive material from
causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.
After off-road driving, completely inspect the underbody
of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension and exhaust system for damage. Check
threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the
chassis, drivetrain components, steering and suspension.
Retighten, if required, to torque values specified in the
Service Manual. Also check for accumulations of vegetation or brush that could become a fire hazard, or conceal
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
347
CAUTION!
Under frequent heavy-duty driving conditions,
change all lubricants and lubricate body components, all driveline joints and steering linkage more
often than in normal service to prevent excessive
wear.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
348
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will

have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near sea-coast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
349
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or

similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept
clear and open.
Aluminum wheels should be cleaned regularly with a

mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes.
Only Mopar cleaners are recommended. Do not use
oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the
wheels protective finish.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
350
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads,
steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective
finish.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean, then
Mopar Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar Total
Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Leather Seat Care & Cleaning
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
351
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
WARNING!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
352
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be

used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild

soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.
FUSE PANEL
Interior Fuses
The fuse panel is on the left side of the instrument panel.
A label is attached to the fuse panel cover to identify each
fuse for ease of replacement.
Cavity
1
Fuse
15 Amp Blue
2
3
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
8
9
Spare
10 Amp Red
10
11
Spare
15 Amp Blue
4
5
6
Fuse Panel
353
Description
Horn Relay, Power Sunroof
Relay, Power Window Relay
Rear Fog Lights (Export Only)
Cigar Lighter
Headlight Low Beam Right
Headlight Low Beam Left
Body Control Module/Power
Door Locks
Left Park Light/Left Tail
Lamp/License Plate Lamp
Right Park Light/RightTail
Lamp/License Plate Lamp/
Cluster
Flasher
354
Cavity
12
13
Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
14
10 Amp Red
15
16
Spare
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
17
18
19
Description
Stop Lights
Body Control Module/CMTC/
Cluster/Pass. Airbag On,Off
Indicator, Auto Daylight
Mirror/Light Bar Switch (Renegade Only)
PDC Fuel Pump/AC Clutch,
Starter Relay/Engine
Controller/Transmission Controller (Diesel Only)
Power Outlet (Rear)
Rear Wiper
Radio Choke & Relay
Frt Fog Lights/Trailer Tow
Stop and Turn Lights
Cavity
20
21
22
23
24
25
Fuse
Spare
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Spare
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
26
27
28
29
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Spare
10 Amp Red
30
31
15 Amp Blue
Spare
Description
Radio
Power Sunroof Relay/Antenna
Module (Export Only)
PDC Blower Motor
Heated Seat Switches/HVAC
Control Head/Trailer Tow Battery Charge
Headlight High Beam Right
Headlight High Beam Left
Heated Mirrors/Rear Window
Defroster Indicator
Heated Seat Module
Cavity
32
Fuse
10 Amp Red
33
10 Amp Red
34
15 Amp Blue
35
Spare
Description
Wiper Switch/Front and Rear
Wipers
SKIM Module/Data Link Connector
Body Control Module/
Cluster/Interior Lights, Hands
Free Module/Radio/CMTC/
ITM Module & Siren (Export
Only)
Cavity
36
Fuse
10 Amp Red
37
38
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
39
10 Amp Red
355
Description
Airbag Control Module/
Occupation Classification
Module (Right Front Seat)
Airbag Control Module
ABS Controller/Shifter Assembly
Hazard Flasher (Turn Signals)/
Backup Lamp Switch (Manual
Transmission Only)/
Transmission Range Switch
(Automatic Transmission
Only)
356
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)

Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distribution center located in the engine compartment near the
battery. This power center houses plug-in Cartridge
fuses which replace in-line fusible links. The power
center also contains Mini fuses and plug-in full and
micro ISO relays. A label inside the latching cover of the
center identifies each component for ease of replacement,
if necessary. Cartridge fuses and relays can be obtained
from your authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
Power Distribution Center (Gasoline Engines)

Cavity
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp Red
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
50 Amp Red
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
Description
Blower Motor
Cavity
F12
F13
Radiator Fan
F14
JB Power
ABS Pump
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
NGC Trans
ASD
JB Power
Ign/Start
JB Power
Trailer Tow
Open
F22
F23
F24
Fuse
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
357
Description
Light Bar
Windows
Ignition Switch
JB Power
Open
Open
Open
Rear Window Defogger (HBL)
Open
A/C Clutch
Open
Open
Fuel Pump
358
Cavity
F25
F26
F27
F28
R29
R30
R31
R32
R33
R34
Fuse
Description
20 Amp YelABS Valves
low
25 Amp Natu- Injectors
ral
Open
15 Amp Blue Starter
Half ISO Re- Fuel Pump
lay
Half ISO Re- Starter
lay
Half ISO Re- Wiper On/Off
lay
Half ISO Re- Wiper Hi/Lo
lay
Full ISO Relay H. Blower
Full ISO Relay Rad. Fan Hi
Cavity
R35
R36
R37
R38
R39
R40
Fuse
Half ISO Relay
Half ISO Relay
Description
A/C Clutch
Open
NGC Trans
Open
Full ISO Relay ASD
Full ISO Relay Rad. Fan Lo
Power Distribution Center (Diesel Engines)

Cavity
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp Red
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp Pink
50 Amp Red
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Blower Motor
Cavity
F12
F13
Radiator Fan
F14
JB Power
ABS Pump
Open
ASD
JB Power
Ign/Start
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
JB Power
Trailer Tow
Fuel Heater
F22
F23
F24
Fuse
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Yellow
359
Description
Light Bar
Windows
Ignition Switch
JB Power
ASD Feed
Open
Open
Rear Window Defogger (HBL)
Open
A/C Clutch
Open
Open
Open
360
Cavity
F25
F26
F27
F28
R29
R30
R31
R32
R33
R34
Fuse
Description
20 Amp YelABS Valves
low
25 Amp Natu- Injectors
ral
Open
15 Amp Blue Starter
Half ISO
Fuel Heater
Relay
Half ISO
Starter
Relay
Half ISO
Wiper On/Off
Relay
Half ISO
Wiper Hi/Lo
Relay
Full ISO Relay H. Blower
Full ISO Relay Rad. Fan Hi
Cavity
R35
R36
R37
R38
R39
R40
Fuse
Half ISO
Relay
Half ISO
Relay
Description
A/C Clutch
Viscous Heat
Open
Open
Full ISO Relay ASD
Full ISO Relay Rad. Fan Lo
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
Remove Cartridge fuse #15 in the Power Distribution
Center labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution
Center location #11 labeled IOD Storage.
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
361
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
A/C Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Serviceable
Ashtray Receiver Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Climate Control (Manual A/C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Front Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Rear Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2142
Lighted Vanity Mirror *. . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 6501966
Underpanel Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
Telltale/Hazard Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
* Available only from authorized dealers.
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 P27/7W
Center High-Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . 921/W16W
Fog Lights (Sport/Limited Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Front Park/Turn Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 P27/7W
362
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007QL
Rear License Plate Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Stop/Tail Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 P27/7W
Rear Turn Signal Lights (2) . . . . . . . . . 3757 APY27/7W
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer.
3. Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlamp

unit housing.
4. Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlamp
housing counter-clockwise to unlock it.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean
the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Head Light
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine compartment to access the headlamp bulb lock ring.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the

bulb.
Front Turn Signal

1. Remove the screw from the turn signal/park lamp
unit.
363
3. Rotate the bulb socket counter-clockwise to unlock it.
CAUTION!
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
7
2. Pull the inboard side of the lamp away enough to
disengage the tab that secures the outboard side of the
lamp from the slot in the front bumper fascia.
364
Front Fog Light (Front Fascia Mounted)

1. Remove the three screws from the backside of the
lamp housing.
3. Pinch together the two hooked ends of the bulb

retainer clip and disengage them from the slots in the
mounting flange on the back of the lens reflector.
4. Pivot the retainer clip up off of the bulb flange and out
of the way.
CAUTION!
2. Pull the bezel and lens away from the lamp housing
far enough to access and disconnect the wiring connector
from the bulb pigtail wire.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the mounting flange and

replace the bulb.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, and Back-Up Lights

1. Open the swing gate.
2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.
365
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)

1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.
7
3. Remove rear lamp assembly.
4. Rotate the socket on the back of the lamp housing
counter-clockwise to unlock it.
5. Replace the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL

housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and reattach the
CHMSL.
366
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
20.5 Gallons
Metric
78 Liters
5 Qts
4.7 Liters
14 Qts
13.2 Liters
367
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (3.7L Engine)
Oil Filter (3.7L Engine)
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology)
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Mopar Oil Filter (P/N 4781452AA or 4781452BB)
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
87 Octane (89 Octane should be used for trailer towing purposes)
368
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Mopar Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent (meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-9224)
Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) or equivalent.
Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant (SAE 75W-90) or equivalent. For trailer
towing, the lubricant should be replaced with Mopar Synthetic Gear &
Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140) or equivalent. Models equipped with TracLok require a limited-slip additive.
Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 370
Schedule B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Schedule A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
370
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The Scheduled maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
Inspection and service also should be done any time a

malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule B. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
Stop and go driving
Excessive engine idling
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
Trailer towing
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service)

NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the
Maintenance Schedules section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant/anti-freeze every 102,000
miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, whichever comes first,
and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules
section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule B.
Second is Schedule A. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule B.
371 M
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
At Each Stop for Fuel
D
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully UL
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Check the windshield washer solvent, add as required.
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
372
Once a Month
At Each Oil Change
Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or

damage.
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals

as required.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission, and add as needed.
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
Inspect the exhaust system.

Inspect brake hoses.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
After completion of off-road operation, the underside
of the vehicle should be thoroughly inspected. Examine threaded fasteners for looseness.
SCHEDULE B
Schedule B
Follow this schedule if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
Stop and go driving
Excessive engine idling
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
Trailer towing
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service)
373 M

If equipped for and operated with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your

engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the
Maintenance Schedules section of this manual.
S
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant/anti-freeze every 102,000
miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, whichever comes first,
and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules
section of this manual.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M 374 SCHEDULE B
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
X
9,000
(15 000)
X
12,000
(20 000)
X
15,000
(25 000)
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE B
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
18,000
(30 000)
X
X
21,000
(35 000)
X
24,000
(40 000)
X
X
27,000
(45 000)
X
375 M
30,000
(50 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M 376 SCHEDULE B
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N
C Rotate the tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
necessary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed.
33,000
(55 000)
X
36,000
(60 000)
X
X
39,000
(65 000)
X
42,000
(70 000)
X
45,000
(75 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE B
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced
at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if necessary.
Inspect manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid. Replace
main sump filter and spin-on cooler return filter (if
equipped).
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required
if belt was previously.
Drain and refill the transfer case fluid.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze.
48,000
(80 000)
X
X
51,000
(85 000)
X
54,000
(90 000)
X
X
57,000
(95 000)
X
377 M
60,000
(100 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
X
M 378 SCHEDULE B
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N
C Rotate the tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
necessary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not
required if belt was previously replaced.
63,000
(105 000)
X
66,000
(110 000)
X
X
69,000
(115 000)
X
72,000
(120 000)
X
75,000
(125 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE B
Miles
(Kilometers)
Rotate the tires.
necessary.
78,000
(130 000)
X
X
81,000
(135 000)
X
84,000
(140 000)
X
X
87,000
(145 000)
X
379 M
90,000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M 380 SCHEDULE B
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N
C Rotate the tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
necessary.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if
not done at 60,000 miles (100 000 km).
93,000
(155 000)
X
96,000
(160 000)
X
X
99,000
(165 000)
X
102,000
(170 000)
X
105,000
(175 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE B
Miles
108,000
(Kilometers)
(180 000)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced
X
at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
X
Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if necessary.
X
Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid. Replace main
sump filter and spin-on cooler return filter (if equipped).
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required
if belt was previously replaced.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if not
replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
111,000
(185 000)
X
381 M
114,000
117,000
120,000
(190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M 382 SCHEDULE B
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N
C Rotate the tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
necessary.
123,000
(205 000)
X
126,000
(210 000)
X
X
129,000
(215 000)
X
132,000
(220 000)
X
135,000
(225 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE B
Miles
(Kilometers)
Rotate the tires.
necessary.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if
not done at 120,000 miles (200 000 km).
138,000
(230 000)
X
141,000
(235 000)
X
144,000
(240 000)
X
147,000
(245 000)
X
383 M
150,000
(250 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
384
SCHEDULE B
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime

a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
Applies only if vehicle is used for frequent trailer
towing or fleet/commercial service.
This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain
emissions warranty.
Off-highway operation, trailer towing, taxi, limousine,

bus, snow plowing, or other types of commercial service
or prolonged operation with heavy loading, especially in
hot weather, require front and rear axle service indicated
with a in Schedule B. Perform these services if the
vehicle is usually operated under these conditions.
SCHEDULE A
385 M
Schedule A
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace
if necessary.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add as necessary.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
24,000
(40 000)
[24]
X
X
30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M 386 SCHEDULE A
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
36,000
(60 000)
[36]
X
X
X
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
X
X
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X
54, 000
(90 000)
[54]
X
X
X
SCHEDULE A
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if belt was previously replaced.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze. Where
both time and mileage are indicated, follow the interval
which occurs first.
Inspect transfer case fluid, add as necessary.
60,000
(100 000)
[60]
X
X
X
66,000
(110 000)
[66]
X
X
72,000
(120 000)
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
387 M
78,000
(130 000)
[78]
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M 388 SCHEDULE A
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
essary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if previously replaced.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze if not
done at 60 months.
84,000
(140 000)
[84]
X
X
90,000
(150 000)
[90]
X
X
X
96,000
(160 000)
[96]
X
X
102, 000
(170 000)
[102]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE A
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if previously replaced.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if not
done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
108,000
(180 000)
[108]
X
X
114,000
(190 000)
[114]
X
X
120,000
(200 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
389 M
126,000
(210 000)
[126]
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
M 390 SCHEDULE A
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
N Rotate the tires.
C
E Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if
previously replaced.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if not done
at 120,000 miles (200 000 km).
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a
malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
132,000
(220 000)
[132]
X
X
X
X
138,000
(230 000)
[138]
X
X
144,000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X
150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain
emissions warranty.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS
Suggestions For Obtaining Service For
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Department Of Transportation Uniform

Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 395
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
392
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturers dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to

assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealers
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturers Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturers Customer
Center should include the following information:
Owners name and address
Owners telephone number (home and office)
Dealership name
393
Vehicle identification number

Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 218004
Auburn Hills, MI 483218004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone (800) 4652001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 7291248 or 7291240
Outside Mexico (525) 7291248 or 7291240
394
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturers new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturers Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturers Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturers Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturers Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturers Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturers Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturers new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)

See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChryslers warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
395
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
396
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
Owners Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at:

18008904038 (U.S.)
18003871143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tires
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
397
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety

Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
398
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
400
INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,241

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 324
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,64,173
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,241
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 20
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,345
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
INDEX
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 150

Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Brake Assist Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,168,241
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
401
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 74
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,362
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,276
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cargo Compartment
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10
402
INDEX
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,144
CD (Compact Disc) Changer . . . . . . . . . . 181,182,194
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . 177,180,184,187
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 202
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,202
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,69,71
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,192
Clutch Interlocking Ignition System

Command-Trac Operation . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 211,216
. . . . . . . . . . . 226
. . . . . . . . . . . 202
. . . . . . . . . . . 141
. . . . . . . . . . . 141
. . . . . . . . . . . 141
. . . . . . . . . . . 139
. . . . . . . . . . . 133
. . . . . . . . . . . 394
. . . . . . . . . . . 325
. . . . . . . . . . . 333
. . . . . . . . . . . 335
. . . . . . . . . . . 366
. . . . . . . . . . . 337
. . . . . . . . . . . 337
. . . . . . . . . . . 334
. . . . . . . . . . . 333
. . . . . . . . . . . 337
. . . . . . . . . . . 336
INDEX
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 334,366
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . . 327
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Daytime Running Lights . . .
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . .
Defroster, Rear Window . . .
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .
Diagnostic System, Onboard
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
118
319
158
121
317
119
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
403
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,28
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 150
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 123
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 174
10
404
INDEX
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 135

Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 318,370
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273,366

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 168
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,366
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,366
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,276
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
INDEX
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,363,365
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 367
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
405
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,364

Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,232
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,229
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273,366
System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,278,279
10
406
INDEX
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,279,317
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218,221
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 143
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
INDEX
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Identifying Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Cables (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Wiring System (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . 324
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,119
407
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,306
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key Release Button . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
14
18
16
16
21
14
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
10
408
INDEX
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 68,69
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,361
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,173
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,175
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,119
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,175
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 174
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,364
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,118
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,119
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 168
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
INDEX
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,175
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,172
Transmission Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,119,166,363,365
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 166
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,28
409
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Schedule A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Schedule B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 168,318
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,344
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
10
410
INDEX
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,395
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Occupant Classification System (OCS) . . . . . . . . . . 56
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . 235,347
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . 235,347
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
INDEX
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,366
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,366
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,318
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Owners Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 396
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
411
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 250
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 150
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,330
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,32
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10
412
INDEX
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,202
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,184
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,342
Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 297
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 298
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Remote CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 200
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
INDEX
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Seat Belts
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 43
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,71
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
413
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,28
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Selec-Trac Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,192
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 218
10
414
INDEX
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,221
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,232
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,166,363,365
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Spark Plug Wires (Ignition Cables/Wires) . . . . . . 324
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,330
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,361
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 49
Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
INDEX
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 169
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 249,250
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,397
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
415
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,250
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,245
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
10
416
INDEX
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,311
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,343
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,345
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,345
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Transmitter Battery Service
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . 143
Transmitter Programming
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,166,363,365
UConnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
INDEX
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,280
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,361
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
417
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,332

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,32
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,121
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,332
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Wiring, Ignition (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10

2007 KJ Liberty Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 KJ Liberty Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 KJ Liberty Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 9

handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills

and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control it

Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided

Roll Over Warning Label

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Security Alarm System If Equipped . . . . . . . . .19

Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .16

To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . .16

To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .16

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Important Note About Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlatch The Swing Gate Flip-Up Window . .23

Power Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .24

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .39

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt

Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .43